Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 260

PSTN Services

Table of Contents ......................................................................................... i


Chapter 1 PSTN Basic Services .................................................................. 1-1
Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN Supplementary Services ........ 2-1
2.1 Service Syntax Analysis .................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Service Priority .................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 Service Compatibility ........................................................................ 2-1
Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services ................................................... 3-1
3.1 Abbreviated Dialing ........................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Absent Subscriber ............................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Advice of Charge (AOCE) ................................................................. 3-5
3.4 Assigned Pickup Call in Group ......................................................... 3-7
3.5 Assigned Trunk Line Call .................................................................. 3-8
3.6 Automatic Call Memory ..................................................................... 3-10
3.7 Block the Blocker .............................................................................. 3-15
3.8 Booking Call ...................................................................................... 3-16
3.9 Brazil Hold ......................................................................................... 3-18
3.10 Call Back ......................................................................................... 3-18
3.11 Call Forwarding Table ..................................................................... 3-21
3.12 Call Forwarding Busy ...................................................................... 3-23
3.13 Call Forwarding No Reply ............................................................... 3-26
3.14 Call Forwarding to Voice Mailbox ................................................... 3-28
3.15 Call Forwarding Unconditional ........................................................ 3-31
3.16 Call Transfer ................................................................................... 3-33
3.17 Call Waiting ..................................................................................... 3-35
3.18 Call Watch....................................................................................... 3-38
3.19 Caller Hooking ................................................................................ 3-39
3.20 Caller Name Display ....................................................................... 3-41
3.21 Caller Name Send........................................................................... 3-41
3.22 Calling Line Identification During Call Waiting ................................ 3-42
3.23 Calling Line Identification Presentation ........................................... 3-44
3.24 Calling Line Identification Restriction .............................................. 3-45
3.25 Cancel All Registered Services ....................................................... 3-47
3.26 Cancel Call Waiting ......................................................................... 3-48
3.27 CCBS .............................................................................................. 3-49
3.28 CD ................................................................................................... 3-49
3.29 Change Password........................................................................... 3-49
3.30 Circular Hunting Service ................................................................. 3-51
3.31 CLIR Booking Default ..................................................................... 3-52
3.32 CLIR Override ................................................................................. 3-52
3.33 CLIR Reject ..................................................................................... 3-53
3.34 Co-Group Pickup ............................................................................ 3-54
3.35 Collect Call ...................................................................................... 3-54
3.36 Conference ..................................................................................... 3-58
3.37 Conference Floating Allowance ...................................................... 3-61
3.38 Conference Incoming Call............................................................... 3-61
3.39 Do-not-Disturb................................................................................. 3-63
3.40 Custom Local Area Signaling Service............................................. 3-64
3.41 HONGKONG MWN ......................................................................... 3-74
3.42 Hot Line ........................................................................................... 3-74
3.43 Immediate Hotline ........................................................................... 3-76
3.44 Inquiry ............................................................................................. 3-78
3.45 List Conference ............................................................................... 3-81
3.46 Malicious Call Identification ............................................................. 3-86
3.47 Message Waiting Indication ............................................................ 3-87
3.48 No Disturb When Calling ................................................................. 3-88
3.49 Number Barring ............................................................................... 3-90
3.50 Number Incomplete ......................................................................... 3-92
3.51 Operator Call Barring ...................................................................... 3-93
3.52 Operator Interrupt ........................................................................... 3-94
3.53 Operator Intrusion ........................................................................... 3-96
3.54 Operator Login ................................................................................ 3-98
3.55 Operator Monitoring ........................................................................ 3-98
3.56 Outgoing Call Barring ...................................................................... 3-100
3.57 Park on ............................................................................................ 3-102
3.58 Password Call ................................................................................. 3-103
3.59 Permanent Booking CLIR ............................................................... 3-105
3.60 Play Charge Information ................................................................. 3-106
3.61 Play Voice ....................................................................................... 3-109
3.62 PrePaid Service .............................................................................. 3-111
3.63 Prompt of Incoming Call.................................................................. 3-123
3.64 Prompt of Outgoing Call.................................................................. 3-125
3.65 Quick Access .................................................................................. 3-127
3.66 Registered Call ............................................................................... 3-128
3.67 Remote Active CFB ........................................................................ 3-131
3.68 Remote Active CFNR ...................................................................... 3-133
3.69 Remote Active CFU ........................................................................ 3-136
3.70 Secretary ......................................................................................... 3-138
3.71 Secretary Station ............................................................................ 3-141
3.72 Special Number Prompt Tone......................................................... 3-143
3.73 Telephone Set Self-Test ................................................................. 3-150
3.74 Temporary Booking CLIP and CLIR ............................................... 3-152
3.75 Three-Party Service ........................................................................ 3-156
3.76 Trunk Interrupt ................................................................................ 3-159
3.77 Trunk Intrusion ................................................................................ 3-160
3.78 Trunk Monitoring ............................................................................. 3-162
3.79 Voice Recording.............................................................................. 3-164
3.80 Voltage Ascending Mode Voice Message ...................................... 3-165
3.81 Wake up Service ............................................................................. 3-166
Centrex Services
Table of Contents ......................................................................................... i
Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services ..................................................... 1-1
Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services ............................................................... 2-1
2.1 Basic Call Services ........................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Centrex Operator Services ............................................................... 2-2
Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services ................................................ 3-1
ISDN Services
Table of Contents ......................................................................................... i
Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System ....................................................... 1-1
1.1 Features of the C&C08 ISDN............................................................ 1-1
1.2 Network Structure and Signaling Composition of C&C08 ISDN ....... 1-2
1.2.1 ISDN Network Structure ........................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 ISDN Signaling Composition .................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 ISDN Interface .......................................................................... 1-4
Chapter 2 ISDN Services ............................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Basic Services .................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Bearer Services ................................................................................ 2-3
2.3 User Integrated Services .................................................................. 2-5
2.4 Supplementary Services ................................................................... 2-6
2.5 Centrex Services ............................................................................... 2-4
Appendix
Table of Contents ......................................................................................... i
Appendix A Other Services .......................................................................... A-1
A.1 Authentication Service ...................................................................... A-1
A.2 Call Forward of Hunting Group Service ............................................ A-2
A.3 Call Forwarding Restriction .............................................................. A-3
A.4 Making, Modifying and Removing Tones and Announcements
on Line .................................................................................................... A-4
A.5 Number Change Prompt ................................................................... A-7
A.6 Number Portability (NP) .................................................................... A-9
A.7 Operator Override DDS .................................................................... A-10
A.8 Preselection Service ......................................................................... A-11
A.9 Priority Subscriber ............................................................................ A-12
A.10 Single Call Multi-Display Service .................................................... A-13
A.11 Toll Call Indication Service ............................................................. A-14
A.12 Week-based Multiple Wake up ....................................................... A-16
Appendix B Relationship between Different Services .................................. B-1
Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................... C-1
HUAWEI

1. PSTN Services

2. Centrex Services

3. ISDN Services

4. Appendix

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System


Operation Manual – Supplementary Services Volume

OVSV610R103
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual

Volume Supplementary Services Volume

Manual Version T2-011655-20041230-C-4.10

Product Version OVSV610R103

BOM 31160755

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company
headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright © 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any


means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,


TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co.,
Ltd.

All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual

Release Notes

The product version that corresponds to the manual is the C&C08 Digital SPC
Switching System OVSV610R103.

Related Manuals

The following manuals provide more information about the C&C08 Digital SPC
Switching System.

Manual Content
It consists of two volumes. The Troubleshooting Volume
details on how to locate and process common faults in the
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System, while the Routine
Maintenance Manual Maintenance Volume offers operational methods and
maintenance suggestions for routine maintenance and
special maintenance.

It offers an overall introduction to the C&C08 Digital SPC


C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System
Switching System, including the system structure, hardware
Technical Manual
functions, software functions, services and applications.
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching It is used for assisting the users in data configurations and
System Operation Manual typical applications.
It provides information for the system installation, including
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System
the installation of the cabinets, cables, power system and
Installation Manual
various boards.
It introduces almost all the boards available in the C&C08
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Digital SPC Switching System. For each board, it describes
Board Manual its functions, features, interface signal, functional principle
and technical Indexes.

Organization

The manual describes the services and functions provided by the C&C08 Switch and
gives the instructions of how to implement the above-mentioned functions.

There are three independent parts and two appendixes in the manual.
z PSTN Services elaborates on the PSTN services (including basic services and
supplementary services) and the operation methods of the PSTN supplementary
services.
z Centrex Services focuses on the Centrex conception and services (including
basic services and supplementary services) and the operation methods of the
Centrex value added services.
z ISDN Services describes the ISDN conception and services (including basic
services and supplementary services) and the operation methods of the ISDN
supplementary services.
z Appendix A Other Services describes the features provided by the switch.
z Appendix B Relationship between Different Services offers the relationship
between different services.
z Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations collects the acronyms and
abbreviations used in the manual.

Intended Audience

The manual is intended for the following readers:


z Marketing staff
z Technical personnel
z Operation & maintenance personnel

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions

Convention Description
Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.
Boldface Headings are in Boldface.
Courier New Terminal Display is in Courier New.

II. Command conventions

Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
italic Command arguments are in italic.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

III. GUI conventions

Convention Description

<> Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click <OK> button.
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside
[]
square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example,
/
[File/Create/Folder].

IV. Keyboard operation

Format Description
Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. For example,
<Key>
<Enter>, <Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A>.
Press the keys concurrently. For example, <Ctrl+Alt+A> means the three
<Key1+Key2>
keys should be pressed concurrently.

V. Symbols

Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note: Means a complementary description.


HUAWEI

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System


Operation Manual – Supplementary Services
Volume

PSTN Services
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 PSTN Basic Services................................................................................................... 1-1

Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN Supplementary Services.................................... 2-1


2.1 Service Syntax Analysis .................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Service Priority................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Service Compatibility ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services .................................................................................. 3-1


3.1 Abbreviated Dialing............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Absent Subscriber.............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Advice of Charge (AOCE).................................................................................................. 3-5
3.4 Assigned Pickup Call in Group .......................................................................................... 3-7
3.5 Assigned Trunk Line Call................................................................................................... 3-8
3.6 Automatic Call Memory.................................................................................................... 3-10
3.7 Block the Blocker ............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.8 Booking Call..................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.9 Brazil Hold........................................................................................................................ 3-18
3.10 Call Back........................................................................................................................ 3-18
3.11 Call Forwarding Table.................................................................................................... 3-21
3.12 Call Forwarding Busy..................................................................................................... 3-23
3.13 Call Forwarding No Reply.............................................................................................. 3-26
3.14 Call Forwarding to Voice Mailbox .................................................................................. 3-28
3.15 Call Forwarding Unconditional....................................................................................... 3-31
3.16 Call Transfer .................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.17 Call Waiting.................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.18 Call Watch...................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.19 Caller Hooking ............................................................................................................... 3-39
3.20 Caller Name Display ...................................................................................................... 3-41
3.21 Caller Name Send ......................................................................................................... 3-41
3.22 Calling Line Identification During Call Waiting............................................................... 3-42
3.23 Calling Line Identification Presentation ......................................................................... 3-44
3.24 Calling Line Identification Restriction............................................................................. 3-45
3.25 Cancel All Registered Services ..................................................................................... 3-47
3.26 Cancel Call Waiting ....................................................................................................... 3-48
3.27 CCBS ............................................................................................................................. 3-49
3.28 CD.................................................................................................................................. 3-49
3.29 Change Password ......................................................................................................... 3-49
3.30 Circular Hunting Service ................................................................................................ 3-51
3.31 CLIR Booking Default .................................................................................................... 3-52

i
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

3.32 CLIR Override ................................................................................................................ 3-52


3.33 CLIR Reject.................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.34 Co-Group Pickup ........................................................................................................... 3-54
3.35 Collect Call..................................................................................................................... 3-54
3.36 Conference .................................................................................................................... 3-58
3.37 Conference Floating Allowance ..................................................................................... 3-61
3.38 Conference Incoming Call ............................................................................................. 3-61
3.39 Do-not-Disturb................................................................................................................ 3-63
3.40 Custom Local Area Signaling Service ........................................................................... 3-64
3.41 HONGKONG MWN ....................................................................................................... 3-74
3.42 Hot Line.......................................................................................................................... 3-74
3.43 Immediate Hotline.......................................................................................................... 3-76
3.44 Inquiry ............................................................................................................................ 3-78
3.45 List Conference.............................................................................................................. 3-81
3.46 Malicious Call Identification ........................................................................................... 3-86
3.47 Message Waiting Indication........................................................................................... 3-87
3.48 No Disturb When Calling ............................................................................................... 3-88
3.49 Number Barring.............................................................................................................. 3-90
3.50 Number Incomplete ....................................................................................................... 3-92
3.51 Operator Call Barring..................................................................................................... 3-93
3.52 Operator Interrupt .......................................................................................................... 3-94
3.53 Operator Intrusion.......................................................................................................... 3-96
3.54 Operator Login ............................................................................................................... 3-98
3.55 Operator Monitoring....................................................................................................... 3-98
3.56 Outgoing Call Barring .................................................................................................. 3-100
3.57 Park on......................................................................................................................... 3-102
3.58 Password Call .............................................................................................................. 3-103
3.59 Permanent Booking CLIR ............................................................................................ 3-105
3.60 Play Charge Information .............................................................................................. 3-106
3.61 Play Voice .................................................................................................................... 3-109
3.62 PrePaid Service ........................................................................................................... 3-111
3.63 Prompt of Incoming Call .............................................................................................. 3-123
3.64 Prompt of Outgoing Call .............................................................................................. 3-125
3.65 Quick Access ............................................................................................................... 3-127
3.66 Registered Call ............................................................................................................ 3-128
3.67 Remote Active CFB ..................................................................................................... 3-131
3.68 Remote Active CFNR .................................................................................................. 3-133
3.69 Remote Active CFU ..................................................................................................... 3-136
3.70 Secretary...................................................................................................................... 3-138
3.71 Secretary Station ......................................................................................................... 3-141
3.72 Special Number Prompt Tone ..................................................................................... 3-143
3.73 Telephone Set Self-Test .............................................................................................. 3-150

ii
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

3.74 Temporary Booking CLIP and CLIR ............................................................................ 3-152


3.75 Three-Party Service..................................................................................................... 3-156
3.76 Trunk Interrupt ............................................................................................................. 3-159
3.77 Trunk Intrusion ............................................................................................................. 3-160
3.78 Trunk Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 3-162
3.79 Voice Recording........................................................................................................... 3-164
3.80 Voltage Ascending Mode Voice Message ................................................................... 3-165
3.81 Wake up Service.......................................................................................................... 3-166

iii
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 PSTN Basic Services

Chapter 1 PSTN Basic Services

The basic service of Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) refers to the basic
call connection functions provided by the switch, including inter-office call, local call,
national toll call, international toll call, tandem call and others. The following is a brief
description of all kinds of calls.

I. Intra-office call

The intra-office call is the call connection initiated by two subscribers in the same
office. In the case of the C&C08 switching system, it is a call connection between two
Switching Module (SM)s managed by one Administration Module
(AM)/Communication Module (CM) or inside an SM. Calls of this kind do not occupy
such resources as trunk.

II. Local call

The C&C08 switching system can provide call connections between local network
subscribers (including municipal subscribers, rural subscribers and county
subscribers) as well as call connections between remote module subscribers and
subscriber concentrator subscribers.

III. National toll call

The C&C08 switching system can provide the subscriber with the outgoing service of
automatic national distance dialing and the automatic incoming service of national toll.
It is the call connection realized by selecting routes and sub-routes and occupying
trunk resources.

IV. International toll call

International toll call is of two types: International automatic call connections and
International semi-automatic connections. The C&C08 switching system can provide
the subscriber with the function of international toll call, including the outgoing service
of automatic international direct distance dialing and the automatic incoming service
of international toll.

V. Tandem call

The C&C08 switching system can provide the trunk-tandem forwarding service of
national toll and international toll.

1-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Supplementary Services

Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN


Supplementary Services

Different countries and different regions may have different requirements for the same
PSTN supplementary services, such as priority and compatibility between different
services. The C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System adopts the following methods to
solve the problems.

2.1 Service Syntax Analysis

For the same PSTN supplementary services, the standards and telecommunication
operators of the different countries and regions may have different demands on
dialing. Now take Abbreviated Dialing for example. In different countries and regions,
the subscriber registration and the dialing mode of abbreviated dialing service may be
different. By adopting external data to describe the input format of supplementary
service, C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System specifies the service input format
according to the requirement of the different countries and regions, thus enabling the
different input formats of the same service in multiple countries and regions.

2.2 Service Priority

For the same PSTN supplementary service, the standards and telecommunication
operators of the different countries and regions may have different demands on
priority. Now take the priority between Call Forwarding Unconditional service and
Do-not-Disturb Service for example. It may be required by some regions that the
incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally when a subscriber is registered with
both Do-not-Disturb Service and Call Forwarding Unconditional service; while in other
regions, the Do-not-Disturb Service may have priority in such a case. By adopting the
external data to describe the priority of the conflicting supplementary services, The
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System specifies the priority of different services
according to the requirement of different countries and regions, thus enabling different
services with different priorities in multiple countries and regions.

2.3 Service Compatibility

For the same PSTN supplementary services, the standards and telecommunication
operators of the different countries and regions may have different demands on
compatibility. Now take the priority between the Call Forwarding Unconditional service

2-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume Chapter 2 Flexible Implementation of PSTN
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Supplementary Services

and the Do-not-Disturb Service for example. In some counties and regions, such as
China, these two services are not compatible. Therefore, the subscriber registered
with the Call Forwarding Unconditional service cannot register the Do-not-Disturb
Service, and conversely is the same case. However, other countries or regions may
want to distinguish them through service priority. By adopting the external data to
describe the compatibility of the conflicting supplementary services, The C&C08
Digital SPC Switching System specifies the compatibility of different services
according to the requirement of the different countries and regions, thus enabling
different services with different compatiblities in multiple countries and regions.

2-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
Before using a service, carry out the ADD CNACLD command to add the service prefix. Otherwise, the
service will be unavailable.
Both the administrator and authorized subscriber can activate and deactivate a service. That is, the
administrator can carry out the REG NSV command to activate a service and the RMV NSV command to
deactivate a service, and an authorized subscriber can activate and deactivate a service on a telephone
through dialing the access code. Only the last setting is effective.

3.1 Abbreviated Dialing

I. Meaning

To facilitate calling, the subscribers can set a short code (2 digits) to represent a
number. This number can be local number, national toll number, or international toll
number, and the latter two shall include the national or international prefix. Each
subscriber can have several abbreviated numbers.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "abbreviated dialing" authority (you can use the command:
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

MN 2-digit abbreviated number (0<=M, N<=9)

TN Telephone number of Subscriber B


1) Service registration

3-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the successful
*51*MN*TN# registration of the service

Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber A dials **MN
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the successful
Subscriber A dials #51*MN#
service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

Suppose the number of Subscriber B is 8883850 (that is, "TN" is 8883850), and its
abbreviated number "MN" is 12 (0<=M, N<=9), the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
*51*12*8883850# successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation

3-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials **12
the ringing tone

Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
Subscriber A dials #51*12#
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z If the same MN has been registered for several times, only the number registered for the last time is
valid.
z This service can also abbreviate the called number to 1 digit, using the same registration, operation
and cancellation method.

3.2 Absent Subscriber

I. Meaning

If a subscriber has "absent subscriber service" registered, when dialing the number of
the subscriber (the callee), the caller will hear the absent subscriber service tone.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "absent subscriber service" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

3-3
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

A Service subscriber.
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *50# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
150 (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When a subscriber dials the number of Subscriber A, he/she will hear the absent
subscriber service tone.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #50# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
151150 (on Pulse phone) the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and call forwarding busy.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and call forwarding unconditional.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and call forwarding no reply.
z When applying for the absent subscriber service, the subscriber cannot use the malicious call
identification service.
z When the absent subscriber service is registered, the subscriber will not have the call waiting
function.
z If a subscriber has activated both the absent service and do not disturb service, the switch gives
priority to the do not disturb service.
z This service cannot be used simultaneously along with the call back on busy service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and wake up service.

3-4
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.3 Advice of Charge (AOCE)

I. Meaning

The registered subscriber initiates a call. After the conversation, the switch sends a
prompt ringing tone to the subscriber, meanwhile the bill information of this
conversation is displayed on the phone set.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "AOC" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service". If a
subscriber wants to use this service, he must select the phone set supporting the
service.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Ordinary subscriber
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
Subscriber A dials *88#
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials B’s number
ringing tone

Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B


Subscriber A hears the ringing tone and the fee of this
Subscriber A hangs up
conversation is displayed on A’s phone set.

3) Service cancellation

3-5
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
Subscriber A dials #88#
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber B's number is 8883010, the operation process is as follows:


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
Subscriber A dials *88#
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials 8883010
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone and the fee of this
Subscriber A hangs up
conversation is displayed on A’s phone set.

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
Subscriber A dials #88#
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

3-6
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z This service is not applicable to the pulse telephone.
z Bit 2 of the CCB internal parameter 4 determines whether registry is needed before using this
service. If it is set to 1, no registry is needed; if it is set to 0, registry is compulsory.
z AOC service includes AOCS (Advice Of Charge at the Start of a call), AOCD (Advice Of Charge
during a call) and AOCE (Advice Of Charge at the End of a call). In which, AOCS and AOCD are
available to ISDN subscriber.

3.4 Assigned Pickup Call in Group

I. Meaning

To intercept the calls to a subscriber, you can dial the service code and the number of
the subscriber.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "assigned pickup call in group" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".

III. Operation

If Subscriber A uses the DTMF phone that is set to the assigned pickup. Subscriber B
is in the same assigned pickup group as Subscriber A in the office, whose number is
PQABCD. Subscriber C is a call-originating subscriber.
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
Subscriber B B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B stop hearing the ringing tone, and
Subscriber A dials *11*PQABCD#
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3-7
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

If Subscriber B's number is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
Subscriber C dials 8883850
B hears the ringing tone

Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone


Subscriber B stop hearing the ringing tone, and
Subscriber A dials *11*8883850#
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
This service requires that pickup party and service subscriber should be set in the same pickup group.

3.5 Assigned Trunk Line Call

I. Meaning

Through this service, calls can be made on the designated trunk lines, Internal Digital
Trunk (IDT) lines and Local Optical Interface Board (OPT) lines.

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.

3-8
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Test user

MMM Module number

N Designated line type (value ranging between 0~2: 0-Trunk line, 1-IDT line,
2-OPT line)

TTTTT Circuit No.

PQRABCD Subscriber B's number


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
The call is connected to Subscriber B through the
Subscriber A dials designated circuit
*66*MMM*N*TTTTT#PQRABCD
Subscriber B hears the ringing
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A or B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose test user A wants to originate a call to Subscriber B through trunk circuit 10
of module 1 and B’s number is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation

3-9
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials The call is connected to Subscriber B through the trunk
*66*001*0*00010#8883850 circuit 10 of module 1. Subscriber B’s phone rings.

Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B.


A or B hooks up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z This service is for test user only. If the current area is Hong Kong, the operator can also use this
service.
z The pulse phone set cannot use this service.
z This service needs no registration or cancellation.

3.6 Automatic Call Memory

I. Meaning

With the automatic call memory service, the switch saves the caller number of the last
call that the service subscriber didn't answer. Later, when the subscriber uses the
phone, he/she will know the last phone number who calls him/her through dialing a
special service code. Moreover, the switch offers the callback function.

The ACM service is available on both the SM and SPM. For the SM, it is the SPT
board or SPM voice resource that sends voice announcements (for related data
configuration, refer to the following part "Data configuration"). For the SPM, it is the
SPD board that sends voice announcements.

II. Data configuration

z Adding the service prefix


ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'*92#, CSTP=IN, CSA=LCO, MINL=4, MAXL=4,
CHSC=65535;

Configure a call prefix "*92#". Set the [SERVICE CATEGORY] parameter to


"intelligent service" and the [SERVICE ATTRIBUTE] parameter to "intra-office".

3-10
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

z Adding an IN access code and DP data


ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'*92#, LEN=4;

ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CSC=0, CODE=K'*92#, SKEY=500;

Add the access code of the prefix "*92#" and configure the TDP configuration data to
trigger the PPS. Set the [SERVICE KEY] parameter to "500" (standing for the ACM
service).
z Adding resource capability
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=500, MN=255;

"255" means that all modules have resource capabilities for the service.
z Adding resource search data
ADD SRCSRH: MDU=1, SRC=BRD, STATE=USE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=2, MDU2=3,
MDU3=4, MDU4=5;

When a module has no resource, it can apply to other modules in the office for
resources after the configuration of the resource search data. It is recommended to
set the search mode to "Fixed search". For recommended search sequence for the
modules in an office, refer to the following table.

Table 3-1 Recommended search sequence for modules in an office

Module The 1st search The 2nd search The 3rd search The 4th search
No. module module module module
1 2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5 1
3 4 5 1 2
4 5 1 2 3
5 1 2 3 4

Note:
For the SM, set the inter-module communication rate to 512 kbit/s. For the SPM, set the inter-module
communication rate to 2 Mbit/s.

z Adding language index


ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;

Configure the language index 1 to stand for English.


z Setting software parameters

3-11
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

MOD SFP: ID=P127, VAL="0xefff";

The command means that the switch will support the card service of the ISP mode,
that is, PPS.

MOD SFP: ID=P56, VAL="fff7";

The switch will immediately back up the ACM dynamic data to the BAM after
refreshing.

MOD SFP: ID=P56, VAL="ffef";

The switch will refresh the ACM information unconditionally when overriding the
number restriction and number incomplete.
z Adding the preselection access code
The ACM service uses the first three Preselection access code records by default.
Recording of voice files should be consistent with the data set here.

ADD PRECODE: IDX=0, ACD=K'001, CN="TELECOM";

ADD PRECODE: IDX=1, ACD=K'002, CN="ORIBITEL";

ADD PRECODE: IDX=2, ACD=K'003, CN="ETB";

"CN" stands for the name of a carrier.


z Centrex subscriber using the ACM service
Centrex subscribers can also use the ACM service but the switch cannot record
Centrex extension numbers. The prefix "*92#" cannot be used within a Centrex group
because it is used to trigger the IN service. To use the ACM service, therefore,
Centrex subscribers need first dial the out-group prefix then the prefix "*92#", or
operators add the prefix "*92#" for a Centrex group. The following configuration is
only for reference.
1) Add an intra-group prefix "*92#"
ADD CXPFX: CXG=0, PFX=K'*92#, CSA=ALLSRVC, MINL=4, MAXL=4;
2) Add a number change record to insert the prefix "0"
ADD DNC: DCX=1, DCT=INS, ND=K'0;
3) Add a Centrex prefix special processing record to insert the out-group prefix
before the prefix "*92#" and the switch will reanalyze the number
ADD CXPFXPRO: CXG=0, PFX=K'*92#, CSC=0, DDC=YES, DDCX=1, RAF=YES;
z Setting the maximum number of service subscribers
Carry out the MOD SMP command to set the maximum number of tuples of the ACM
service dynamic table. The maximum number of tuples of the table determines the
maximum number of subscribers who can successfully use the ACM service in one

3-12
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

module. Set the [PARAMETER] to "maximum number of ACM service subscribers".


The default value is 100.

After the modification of the maximum number of tuples, format the data and load it,
then the modification takes effect.
z Backing up data
Carry out the BKP NSV command to back up the ACM service data in the active
MPU/SPC board to the BAM. After resetting or re-startup, the host will automatically
load the ACM service data from the BAM to the foreground. Set the
[SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE ID] parameter to "ACMS".
z Setting the supplementary service fixed charging mode
ADD NSFIXCHG: NS=ACMU, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHGT=DETAIL;

Each time a subscriber uses the ACM service, the switch will generate a
supplementary service bill (detailed bill).

ADD NSFIXCHG: NS=ACMU, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHGT=PLSACC,


MID=METER1;

Use the meter 1 to count the times that a subscriber uses the ACM service.

III. Operations

To use the ACM service, a subscriber doesn't need to register it as long as he has the
service authority. New service subscribers use the default ACM data whose call
attribute is "National toll" and caller number is "99999999".

Suppose Subscriber B calls Subscriber A. Regardless of whether Subscriber A


answers the call, the switch will record the attribute and caller number of the call as
the ACM information of Subscriber A. If Subscriber B's number is restricted from
displaying or is incomplete, the switch will use the default data to refresh the ACM
information.

After Subscriber A dials a special service code (for example, "*92#"), the switch will
announce the number of Subscriber B. Then there are three possible cases.
z If the call from Subscriber B is an intra-office call or a local call, Subscriber A will
hear an announcement like "To make a callback, please press 1". If Subscriber A
presses 1, the switch will call Subscriber B. If the call from Subscriber B is a
national or international long distance call, the switch will ask Subscriber A to
select a toll carrier. After Subscriber A selects one, the switch will call Subscriber
B through the selected carrier.
z After the voice announcements, if Subscriber A dials a wrong number, the switch
will send an announcement like "The number you dialed is not correct, please
dial again". If Subscriber A dials a wrong number again, the switch will send the

3-13
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

announcement again. For the third time, the switch will send an announcement
like "Sorry, you have surpassed the maximum times for interaction. Thank you
for using, bye" and then send busy tone.
z If Subscriber A dials no number after the prompt of selecting a carrier for five
seconds, the switch will send busy tone directly.
The cancellation of the ACM service authority of a subscriber will cause the switch to
delete the corresponding data in the ACM-service dynamic table. After the deletion,
the original data cannot be recovered. If you re-add the service authority for the
subscriber, all the service data of the subscriber will be initialized to the default data.
Therefore, take care when canceling the ACM service authority of a subscriber.

IV. Related commands

z LST NSVUSER
You can carry out the LST NSVUSER command to list the total number of the ACM
service subscribers of an office and their detailed information.
z DSP NSV
You can carry out the DSP NSV command to view the records in the backed-up ACM
dynamic table on the background. Set the [SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE ID]
parameter to "ACMS".

Note:
The ACM service is available only for the subscribers of a non-SSP end office. Only ST, DSL, and V5ST
subscribers can use this service.

V. Tunisian mode

The above mode is the Colombian mode.

In the Tunisian mode, suppose there is an ordinary subscriber A in the office A who
has activated the ACM service, and there is a subscriber B (belonging to the office A
or other office) who has called the subscriber A but received no answer. After dialing a
special supplementary service prefix, the subscriber A will be connected to the
subscriber who is the last one to call him but receive no answer (if there are multiple
subscribers who make calls to the subscriber A but receive no answer, the switch
connects the subscriber A only to the last time subscriber).

The differences between the Colombian mode and the Tunisian mode are as follows:
z In the Tunisian mode, the switch records the caller number of a call only when
the service subscriber does not answer the call.

3-14
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

z In the Tunisian mode, the switch directly makes a callback and gives no prompt
after the service subscriber dials the ACM service number.
z The Tunisian mode requires no configuration of the IN service data and related
voice files
Bit 5 of the Call Testing Parameter 4 (P56) controls whether the ACM service is of the
Colombian mode or of the Tunisian mode. By default, it is of the Colombian mode.

To use the ACM service in the Tunisian mode, configure the following data:
z Modify Bit 5 of the software parameter P56 to "0".
MOD SFP: ID=P56, VAL="FFDF";
z Add the prefix data and set the [SERVICE ATTRIBUTE] parameter to "Use
automatic call memory by DTMF".
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'*92#, CSTP=NEW, CSA=DACMS, MINL=4, MAXL=4,
CHSC=65535;

3.7 Block the Blocker

This service is a terminating feature. It enables a subscriber to reject incoming calls


carried no Calling Line Identification (CLI) information or the CLI information is not
allowed to be displayed to the subscriber.

The rejected calls will be routed to a denial announcement or a pre-defined tone will
be returned to the caller for advising that the callee does not wish to receive
anonymous call.

When this feature is activated in the subscriber’s line, normal call termination process
will be provided to those incoming calls meeting with the following conditions.
z Calls carry CLI information and presentation of the CLI information is allowed;
z International call;
z Calls with NI = ‘1’.
If the calls do not meet the conditions, they will be routed to an announcement or a
pre-defined tone will be returned to the callers.

µ Law Analog Subscriber Line Board (DEL) subscribers, Centrex subscribers,


Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Basic Rate Access (BRA) subscribers and
pilot or auxiliary subscribers of any hunting group can activate/deactivate this feature
by pressing the access code *76 / #76.

For ‘B’ number of Duplex Ringing subscriber, the activation and deactivation codes
are *#*76 / *##76.

3-15
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.8 Booking Call

I. Meaning

This service enables the subscriber to automatically originate calls to the called
number assigned beforehand when the pre-set time arrives.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "booking call" authority (you can use the command ADD ST
or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber with the "booking call" authority

HH Hours set by the subscriber (00~23)

MM Minutes set by the subscriber (00~59)

PQABCD Called number


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *67*HHMM*PQABCD# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement
phone) or 167HHMMPQABCD (on Pulse phone) tone of successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When the pre-set time arrives, the switch will first of all send the ringing tone to
Subscriber A. When Subscriber A hooks off, the switch will automatically originate a
call to the registered called number. If the callee is idle, Subscriber A will hear the ring
back tone. When the callee hooks off, both parties begin to talk. At this time, the
registered service will be automatically cancelled. In other case, if the callee is busy,
Subscriber A will hear the busy tone, and after 2 minutes, the switch will ring
Subscriber A again. If the switch fails to establish the call after five attempts, the
registered service will be automatically cancelled.

If Subscriber A does not hook off when the telephone rings, the ringing tone will stop
after 25 seconds. Two minutes later, the switch will ring Subscriber A again.

3-16
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #67# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone
151167 (Pulsed phone) of successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example

Subscriber A whose number is 8883080 with the "booking call" service authority

HH = 10

MM = 20

Subscriber B whose number is 8883010


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *67*1020*8883010# (on Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone
DTMF phone) or 16710208883010 of successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
At 10:20 after successful registration, the switch will first of all send the ringing tone to
Subscriber A. When Subscriber A hooks off, the switch will automatically originate a
call to Subscriber B (whose number is 8883010). If the callee is idle, Subscriber A will
hear the ring back tone. When the callee hooks off, both parties begin to talk. At this
time, the registered service will be automatically cancelled. In other case, if the callee
is busy, Subscriber A will hear the busy tone. After 2 minutes, the switch will ring
Subscriber A again. If the switch fails to establish the call after five attempts, the
registered service will be automatically cancelled.

If Subscriber A does not hook off when the telephone rings, the ringing tone will stop
after 25 seconds. Two minutes later, the switch will ring Subscriber A again.
3) Service cancellation

3-17
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #67# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
151167 (Pulsed phone) successful cancellation of the service

Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Note:
z If the subscriber originates and successfully establishes another call before the pre-set time, the
booked call will be automatically cancelled.
z The called numbers of the booking calls can be either national or international numbers.

3.9 Brazil Hold

It is a Hold service in Brazil. If the callee registers the service, the backward call
indicator "HoldInd" in the ACM which is sent back to the peer exchange will be
"HoldReq". This service can be used only after setting the authority for it.

Before the use of the service, the subscriber should have the "brazil hold" authority
(you can use the command: ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).

3.10 Call Back

I. Meaning

This feature allows the callee to call back the caller. Once the callee turns from the
busy state to the idle state, the caller will hear a special ringing tone.

The call back service shall automatically be cancled when the callee is busy for 20
minutes after automatic call back service is activated. Manual removal of the
activation is allowed.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "call back" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".

3-18
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Callee
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A calls Subscriber B Subscriber A hears the busy tone
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
Subscriber A dials *59#
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Local-office:

Operation Expected result


Subscriber B hangs up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber A hooks off
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

Out-office:

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hears the ringing tone and Subscriber B hears the ringing
Subscriber B hangs up
tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the successful
Subscriber A dials #59#
service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

3-19
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

IV. Example

Suppose the number of Subscriber B is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850 Subscriber A hears the busy tone
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the successful
Subscriber A dials *59#
registration of the service

Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Local-office:

Operation Expected result


Subscriber B hangs up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber A hooks off
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

Out-office:

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hears the ringing tone and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber B hangs up
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
Subscriber A dials #59#
successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

3-20
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z After the "call back on busy" service is activated, if there is a call back and Subscriber A does not
answer it within one minute (the system will stop ringing after one minute) or the call back is
unsuccessful after 20 minutes of successful registration, the registration will be automatically
canceled.
z If a subscriber is not a local subscriber, internal call parameter 2 is used to set this service: BIT 11:
whether to allow local call back
=1: not allowed;
=0: allowed.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and call back on busy
service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call forwarding services and call back on busy
service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for do-not-disturb service and call back on busy service.
z Each subscriber can register only one subscriber for the call back service.
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.11 Call Forwarding Table

I. Meaning

The operator can forward the incoming calls to a subscriber to another number
through setting the call forwarding table of the switch administration system. With this
service, the subscriber can activate or deactivate the call forwarding table to decide
whether to use it or not.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber who has anyone of the following authorities, namely Call Forwarding
Unconditional (CFU), Call Forwarding Busy (CFB), Call Forwarding No Reply (CFNR),
can use this service, the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of
command ADD CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber who has CFU authority, a DTMF phone telephone set and
the password of SSSS. The call forwarding table registers the unconditional
forwarding of Subscriber A's incoming calls to Subscriber B.

3-21
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

C Calling subscriber

1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*572*SSSS# successful registration of the service

Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, Subscriber B hears
A's number the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
#572*SSSS# successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A has CFU authority and uses a DTMF phone telephone set and
has a number of 8883850 and password SSSS of 1234; the call forwarding table
registers the unconditional forwarding of Subscriber A's incoming calls to Subscriber
B. then the operation process is as follows:

1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*572*1234# successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation

3-22
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber C dials 8883850
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang
Service ended
up

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
#572*1234# successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z Data in the call forwarding table will not be affected by activating, verifying or deactivating the table.
Operator can modify the data in the call forwarding table by use of ADD CFDATA and RMV CFDATA
commands.
z For call forwarding success, the subscriber should enjoy the authorities of the forwarding type and
destination number corresponding to records in the call forwarding table.
z Priority is given to the call forwarding registered on phone set other than that in the call forwarding
table.
z The initial state of the call forwarding table is the activated state.

3.12 Call Forwarding Busy

I. Meaning

If a subscriber registers the "CFB" service, all the incoming calls to the subscriber will
be forwarded to another designated number when the subscriber is busy.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CFB" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".

3-23
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Forward-to subscriber

C, D Callers

PQABCD Subscriber B’s number

Subscriber B must be a local office subscriber, otherwise, he/she will hear the busy
tone when using the service.
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *40*PQABCD# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 140PQABCD (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration

Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
After the service is registered, all the calls to Subscriber A will be forwarded to
Subscriber B when Subscriber A is busy.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #40# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
151140 (on Pulse phone) the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

If Subscriber B’s number is 8883850 and Subscriber A’s number is 8883851, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *40*8883850# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone
phone) or 1408883850 (on Pulse phone) of the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

3-24
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber D hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears the
Subscriber D dials 8883851
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber D
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B’s phone
Subscriber C dials 8883851
rings

Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #40# (on DTMF phone) Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
or 151140 (on Pulse phone) successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and call forwarding busy.
z When the call forwarding busy and do-not-disturb services are registered, the do-not-disturb service
will take precedence.
z When the call forwarding busy service is registered, you will not have the call waiting function.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and call forwarding busy.
z The call forwarding unconditional service takes precedence over the call forwarding busy service.
z When Subscriber A calls Subscriber B and the call is forwarded to Subscriber C, if Subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, he/she will get the number of Subscriber A.
z When Subscriber C calls Subscriber A and A forwards the call to Subscriber B on busy, if both
Subscribers A and B have applied for the calling line identification presentation service, only
Subscriber B can identify the caller number of Subscriber C.

3-25
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.13 Call Forwarding No Reply

I. Meaning

After the registration of this service, all the incoming calls to the subscriber will be
forwarded to a designated number if no reply is received within a specified time limit.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CFNR" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Forward-to subscriber

C Caller

PQABCD Subscriber B’s number

Subscriber B must be a local office subscriber, otherwise, he/she will hear the busy
tone when using the service.
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *41*PQABCD# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 141PQABCD (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber C dials the number of Subscriber A
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone

No reply from Subscriber A, 20 seconds later Subscriber B’s phone rings


Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3-26
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #41# (on DTMF phone) Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
or 151141 (on Pulse phone) successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

If Subscriber B’s number is 8883850 and Subscriber A’s number is 8883851, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *41*8883850# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 1418883850 (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber C dials 8883851
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
No reply from Subscriber A, 20 seconds later Subscriber B’s phone rings
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #41# (on DTMF phone) Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
or 151141 (Pulsed phone) successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-27
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and call forwarding no
reply.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy and call forwarding no reply.
z When the call forwarding no reply and do-not-disturb services are registered, the do-not-disturb
service takes precedence.
z When the call forwarding no reply service is registed, the subscriber will not have the call waiting
function.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and call forwarding no reply.
z The call forwarding unconditional takes precedence over call forwarding no reply.
z When Subscriber A calls Subscriber B and the call is forwarded to Subscriber C, if Subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, he/she will get the number of Subscriber A.
z When Subscriber C calls Subscriber A and A forwards the call to Subscriber B on no reply, if both
Subscribers A and B have applied for the calling line identification presentation service, both
Subscribers A and B can identify the caller number of Subscriber C.

3.14 Call Forwarding to Voice Mailbox

I. Meaning

When a callee cannot be connected due to ongoing conversation (busy) or absence


(no reply), the incoming calls can be transferred to the voice mailbox of the subscriber
for recording short messages. The callee can hear these messages by connecting his
mailbox.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the authority of "CF to voice mailbox" (including CFB to voice
mailbox, CFNR to voice mailbox and CFU to voice mailbox), and you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it.

The corresponding voice mailbox numbers have been set in the local information
table. Different numbers can be set to the mailboxes for CFB, CFNR and CFU (You
can use the command SET OFI to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

The mailbox number for CFB to voice mailbox has been set at the local office.

A Service subscriber with the authority of CFB to voice mailbox

3-28
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

B, C Ordinary subscribers

Subscribers A and B are talking now (A is in busy state)


z Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C starts to leave the voice message after hearing the
Subscriber C calls Subscriber A
prompt
Subscriber C hangs up Message leaving ends

The mailbox number for CFNR to voice mailbox has been set at the local office.

A Service subscriber with the authority of CFNR to voice mailbox

B Ordinary subscriber
z Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A
the ring back tone
Subscriber A does not answer the The call is forwarded to the voice mailbox, and Subscriber B
phone starts to leave the message after hearing the prompt

The mailbox number for CFU to voice mailbox has been set at the local office.

A Service subscriber with the authority of CFU to voice mailbox

B Ordinary subscriber
z Service operation
Operation Expected result
The call is forwarded to the voice mailbox, and Subscriber B
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A
starts to leave the message after hearing the prompt

IV. Example

The mailbox number for CFB to voice mailbox set at the local office is 6540001, the
number for CFNR to voice mailbox is 6540002, and the number for CFU to voice
mailbox is 6540003:

SET OFI: BTVM=K'6540001, NTVM=K'6540002, UTVM=K’6540003;

Subscriber A (7770000) has the authority of CFB to voice mailbox:

MOD ST: D=K'7770000, NS=CFBAVM-1;

3-29
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Subscriber B (7770001) has the authority of CFNR to voice mailbox:

MOD ST: D=K'7770001, NS=CFNRAVM-1;

Subscriber C (7770002) has the authority of CFU to voice mailbox:

MOD ST: D=K'7770002, NS=UNTB-1;

Ordinary Subscriber D (7770003) and E (7770004)


z CFB to voice mailbox
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A calls Subscriber D Subscribers A and D talk with each other
Subscriber E starts to leave the voice message after hearing
Subscriber E calls Subscriber A
the prompt

z CFNR to voice mailbox


Operation Expected result
Subscriber D hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
Subscriber D calls Subscriber B
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B stops ringing, and Subscriber D starts to
Subscriber B does not answer the call
leave the voice message after hearing the prompt

z CFU to voice mailbox


Operation Expected result
Subscriber D starts to leave the voice message after
Subscriber D calls Subscriber C
hearing the prompt

Note:
z CFU to voice mailbox enjoys the highest priority among three CF services, that is, when a subscriber
registers both CFU to voice mailbox and CFNR to voice mailbox or CFB to voice mailbox at the
same time, all the incoming calls will be directly transferred to the voice mailbox (CFU to mailbox).
z When a subscriber registers both CFU service and CFU to voice mailbox service, CFU enjoys the
higher priority.
z When a subscriber registers both CFB service and CFB to voice mailbox service, CFB enjoys the
higher priority.
z When a subscriber registers both CFNR service and CFNR to voice mailbox service, CFNR enjoys
the higher priority.

3-30
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.15 Call Forwarding Unconditional

I. Meaning

A subscriber can forward the incoming calls to another number. With this service, all
the incoming calls to the subscriber, no matter what state the subscriber is, will be
automatically forwarded to a designated number.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CFU" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Forward-to subscriber

C Caller

PQABCD Subscriber B’s number (designated by Subscriber A, to which the calls are
forwarded).
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *57*PQABCD# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 157PQABCD (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber A’s Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B’s
number phone rings
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation

3-31
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #57# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 151157 (on Pulse phone) successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

If the telephone number of Subscriber B is 8883850 and Subscriber A’s number is


8883851, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *57*8883850# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 1578883850 (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B’s phone
Subscriber C dials 8883851
rings

Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C


Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #57# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 151157 (on Pulse phone) successful service cancellation

Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-32
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and call forwarding
unconditional.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy and call forwarding unconditional.
z When the call forwarding service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the do-not-disturb service
takes precedence.
z When the call forwarding unconditional is registered, the subscriber will lose the call waiting function.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and call forwarding unconditional.
z The call forwarding unconditional takes precedence over the call forwarding busy.
z The call forwarding unconditional takes precedence over the call forwarding no reply.
z When Subscriber A calls Subscriber B and the call is forwarded to Subscriber C, if Subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, he/she will get the number of Subscriber A.
z When Subscriber C calls Subscriber A and A forwards the call unconditionally to Subscriber B, if
both Subscribers A and B have applied for the calling line identification presentation service, only
Subscriber B can identify the caller number of Subscriber C.

3.16 Call Transfer

I. Meaning

The caller forward by hooking means that when a subscriber, as caller, is in


conversation, he/she can call a third party by pressing the hook. The original callee is
on hold when the third party’s phone rings. The caller may hang up at this time, while
the original callee hears ring back tone. The third party keeps on ringing, and can talk
with the original callee directly after off-hook. The caller is also permitted to hang up
after the conversation with the third party is over, then the third party and the original
callee begin to talk directly.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the CT authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST
to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Ordinary subscriber

3-33
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

C Ordinary subscriber
1) Service registration
This service need not be registered.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber B hears the music and holds on
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
Subscriber C hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

3) Service cancellation
This service need not be canceled.

IV. Example

A Service subscriber with CT authority

B Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883020

C Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883030


1) Service registration
This service need not be registered.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
Subscriber A dials 8883020
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber
Subscriber A presses the hook
B hears the music and holds on
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
Subscriber A dials 8883030
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C

3-34
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

3) Service cancellation
This service need not be canceled.

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone set.

3.17 Call Waiting

I. Meaning

When Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber B and Subscriber C tries to establish


connection with Subscriber A, Subscriber A will be given a prompt of call waiting,
indicating that another subscriber is waiting for talking with him/her.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CW" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B, C Callers
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *58# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 158 (on Pulse phone) successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

3-35
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber
Subscriber B dials Subscriber A’s number
A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the waiting prompt tone, and
Subscriber C dials the number of
Subscriber A hears the call waiting tone when taling
Subscriber A
with Subscriber B
Subscriber B hears the music, Subscriber C hears the
Subscriber A presses the hook ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears the special
dialing tone
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber B
If Subscriber A dials 2
hears the music
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber B
If Subscriber A dials 1
hears the busy tone
The current talking party is held, and Subscribers B and
Then, Subscriber A presses the hook
C hear the music
Talking with another party, and the party held hears the
If Subscriber A dials 2
music
Talking with another party, and the party held hears the
If Subscriber A dials 1
busy tone
If Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers B and C hear the busy tone
If the party talking with Subscriber A
Subscriber A talks with another party
hangs up
If the held party hangs up The talking will not be affected

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #58# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 151158 successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

If Subscriber A’s number is 8883850, then the operation process is as follows:


1) Service registration

3-36
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *58# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 158 (on Pulse phone) successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears
Subscriber B dials 8883850
the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the waiting prompt tone, and Subscriber A
Subscriber C dials 8883850
hears the call waiting tone when taling with Subscriber B
Subscriber B hears the music, Subscriber C hears the ring back
Subscriber A presses the hook
tone, and Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber B hears
If Subscriber A dials 2
the music
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber B hears
If Subscriber A dials 1
the busy tone
Then, Subscriber A presses the The current talking party is held, and Subscribers B and C hear
hook the music
If Subscriber A dials 2 Talking with another party, and the party held hears the music
Talking with another party, and the party held hears the busy
If Subscriber A dials 1
tone
If Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers B and C hear the busy tone
If the party talking with
Subscriber A then talks with another party
Subscriber A hangs up
If another held party hangs up The talking will not be affected

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #58# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 151158 successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-37
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z If Subscriber A ignores the call made by Subscriber C, 20 seconds later, the system will
automatically cancel the call waiting tone to Subscriber A.
z When the call forwarding services (including call forwarding unconditional, call forwarding no reply
and call forwarding busy) are registered, you will not have the call waiting function.

3.18 Call Watch

I. Meaning

If "call watch" attribute of a subscriber is set to TRUE, the switch will automatically
send alarm information for Observe Call to the alarm console when the subscriber
makes a call. The message displays the subscriber's state.

II. Setting conditions

The administrator modifies subscriber attribute CALL WATCH FLAG to "YES" by


command MOD ST.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
MOD ST: D=K'A, CWF=YES Operation succeeded
Run "C&C08 Switch Alarm"
Subscriber A carries out the operation Alarm information displays the subscriber's state

2) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
MOD ST: D=K'A, CWF=NO Operation succeeded
Run "C&C08 Switch Alarm"
No "Observe Call" alarm information for displaying the
Subscriber A carries out the operation
subscriber's state

3-38
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

IV. Example

Suppose the number of Subscriber A is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:


1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
MOD ST: D=K'8883850, CWF=YES Operation succeeded
Run "C&C08 Switch Alarm"
Subscriber A carries out the operation Alarm information displays the subscriber's state

2) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
MOD ST: D=K'8883850, CWF=NO Operation succeeded
Run "C&C08 Switch Alarm"
No "Observe Call" alarm information for displaying the
Subscriber A carries out the operation
subscriber's state

3.19 Caller Hooking

I. Meaning

When a subscriber, as caller, is in conversation, he/she can call a third party by


pressing the hook. The original callee holds on when the third party’s phone rings.
The caller hangs up at this time, and the original callee hears ring back tone. After the
third party picks up the phone, he/she can talk with the original callee directly.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "caller forward by hooking" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber with the "caller forward by hooking" authority

B Ordinary subscriber

C Ordinary subscriber

3-39
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B’s phone rings, and Subscriber A
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber B
hears the ring back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber B hears the music and holds on
Subscriber C’s phone rings, and Subscriber A
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber C
hears the ring back tone
Subscriber C’s phone rings, and Subscriber B
Subscriber A hangs up
hears the ring back tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

A Service subscriber with the "caller forward by hooking" authority

B Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883020

C Ordinary subscriber, whose number is 8883030


1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B’s phone rings, and Subscriber A hears the ring back
Subscriber A dials 8883020
tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber B hears
hook the music and holds on
Subscriber C’s phone rings, and Subscriber A hears the ring back
Subscriber A dials 8883030
tone
Subscriber C’s phone rings, and Subscriber B hears the ring back
Subscriber A hangs up
tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-40
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.20 Caller Name Display

I. Definition

This specification defines the interworking requirements of the network-to-network


connection for supporting this service in the NP system. An optional parameter
"Generic Name", embedded in the Initial Address Message (IAM) over the Common
Channel Signaling No.7 (CCS7) as stipulated in the ISUP specification, is adopted for
sending the caller name across the network interface. The format of the "Generic
Name" parameter is defined in this specification.

This service enables the delivery of the caller's name to the callee for him/her to
identify the caller. For interworking of this service across the networks that support
this service in Hong Kong, the caller name shall be contained in the optional
parameter "Generic Name", based on American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
T1.641-1995 and embedded in the IAM, which is sent from the originating network to
the terminating network. Query from the terminating network to the originating
network is not supported

II. Description

This feature is provided for:


z Individual Line
z Multiline Hunt Group
z Pilot Line
z Non-Pilot Line

Note:
z It is optional for network operators to support original callee name and redirecting name.
z "Availability" field should be set as "name available" if this service information is presented.
z "Blocking toggle" setting in "Presentation" field is not supported.
z A special phone set (CID-II) is need in this service.

3.21 Caller Name Send

With this service, the caller name is sent. This service can be used only after setting
the authority for it.

You can use the command: ADD ST or MOD ST to set the "caller name send"
authority, the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".

3-41
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.22 Calling Line Identification During Call Waiting

I. Meaning

With this service registered, if there is an incoming call when a subscriber is in


conversation, he/she will hear the CW prompt tone and see the number of the
incoming call on the phone set.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CLIP", “CID during CW” and "CW" authorities (you can use
the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber with "CLIP", "CID during CW" and "CW" authorities and
using a CID phone set

B, C Callers
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *58# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 158 (on Pulse phone) successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber A’s Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears
number the ringing tone

Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B


Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the waiting tone
Subscriber C dials the number of Subscriber A hears Subscriber B and call waiting tone
Subscriber A Subscriber C’s number is displayed on Subscriber A's phone
set
The rest procedures are the same as call waiting service.

3-42
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #58# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 151158 successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example

If Subscriber A uses a CLIP telephone set with the number of 8883850, the operation
process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *58# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 158 (on Pulse phone) successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber A hears
Subscriber B dials 8883850
the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the waiting tone
Subscriber C dials 8883850 Subscriber A hears Subscriber B and call waiting tone Subscriber
C’s number is displayed on Subscriber A's phone set
The rest procedures are the same as call waiting service.

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #58# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
phone) or 151158 successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-43
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
Bit 15 of the CCB testing parameter 2 controls whether the host software is to process number as “A, D,
E, F”. By default, it is set to 0 when the CID during CW is applied.

3.23 Calling Line Identification Presentation

I. Meaning

With this function registered, the callee will have the caller number displayed on
his/her CID phone set.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CLIP" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Ordinary subscriber

B Callee with the CLIP authority and using a CID phone set
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone

Subscriber A dials the Subscriber A hears the ring back tone


telephone number of Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and the number of Subscriber
Subscriber B A is displayed on the phone set
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber B uses a CID phone set with the number of 8883850, the
operation process is as follows:

3-44
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850 Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and the number of Subscriber
A is displayed on the phone set
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z For the following circumstances, the caller number will not be displayed.
a) The flag of permanent CLIR service of the caller is set to true.
b) The caller applies temporary booking of CLIR service.
c) The caller registers CLIR or permanent CLIR service.

3.24 Calling Line Identification Restriction

I. Meaning

With this function, the number of the caller will not be displayed on the phone set of
the callee, even if the callee has registered Calling Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP) service.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CLIR" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

3-45
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

B Called subscriber registered with CLIP service


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
Subscriber A dials *61#
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber A dials the telephone
number of Subscriber B Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and the telephone set
displays "PRIVATE"

Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B


Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
Subscriber A dials #61#
successful cancellation of the service

Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

If Subscriber B uses a CID phone set with the number of 8883850, the operation
process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
Subscriber A dials *61#
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

3-46
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850 Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and the telephone set
displays "PRIVATE"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
Subscriber A dials #61#
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z After the registration of CLIR, the caller number can also be displayed by use of the temporary
reservation of CLIP.
z After the registration of CLIR, the caller number can still be displayed if the callee enjoys the CLIR
override authority.
z Bit 15 of the Central Control Base (CCB) testing parameter 1 decides whether the CLIR registration
is needed. If bit 15 is 0, it is unnecessary to register the CLIR service and the subscriber with the
CLIR authority can directly enjoy it. If bit 15 is 1 (default value), the registration is needed.

3.25 Cancel All Registered Services

I. Meaning

With this service, the subscriber can cancel all the registered services.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber is an ordinary subscriber and the service has been registered in the
"service attribute" of command ADD CNACLD.

3-47
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Ordinary subscriber, whose password is SSSS


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #44*SSSS# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 144SSSS (on Pulse phone) successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
After registering this supplementary service, all other supplementary services
registered by the subscriber will be canceled.
3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A's password is 1234, the operation process is as follows:


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #44*1234# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 1441234 (on Pulse phone) successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
After registering this supplementary service, all other supplementary services
registered by the subscriber will be canceled.
3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3.26 Cancel Call Waiting

Cancel Call Waiting (CCW) is an addition to the Call Waiting (CW) feature and
provides the CW subscriber with the ability to disable the CW feature for the duration
of a phone call. CCW is activated (that is, CW is disabled) by dialing a special code

3-48
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

prior to placing or during a call, and is automatically deactivated when the subscriber
disconnects from the call.

A CW subscriber can disable the CW feature for the duration of a call originated at the
subscriber’s line. The subscriber goes off-hook, receives dialing tone, and dials the
CCW access code (#07). After the access code is dialed, the subscriber receives
recall dialing tone. The subscriber then dials the desired telephone number. CW is
disabled for the duration of the call and automatically restored to the line on
disconnection by the subscriber.

A second CCW procedure, applicable to any established call regardless of whether


the call originated or terminated at the subscriber’s line which had subscribed CW
feature. After a stable talking state has been established, the subscriber can disable
CW by hooking. On recognition of the flash signal, the switching system places the
other party (parties) on hold and returns recall dialing tone to the CW subscriber. The
subscriber then dials the CCW access code. On receiving the access code, the
switching system returns confirmation tone to inform the subscriber that his/her
request to disable the CW feature has been honoured. After returning confirmation
tone, the switching system automatically re-establishes the original connection
between the subscriber and the other party (parties). CW is disabled for the duration
of the call and automatically restored when the subscriber disconnects.

3.27 CCBS

CCBS: Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber, not supported up to now.

3.28 CD

Not supported up to now.

3.29 Change Password

I. Meaning

This service enables the subscribers to change their passwords.

II. Setting conditions

This service can be used directly without registration.

III. Operation

Suppose:

3-49
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

A Service subscriber

SSSS Original password

TTTT New password typed for the first time

RRRR New password typed for the second time (RRRR=TTTT, valid setting)
1) Service registration
This service can be used directly without registration.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone
Subscriber A dials *541*SSSS*TTTT* RRRR#
indicating successful setting of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Null.

IV. Example

If Subscriber A’s original password is 1234 and new password is 1111, the operation
process is as follows:
1) Service registration
This service can be used directly without registration.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*541*1234*1111*1111# successful setting of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Null.

Note:
z If the password SSSS is not correctly entered or TTTT is not the same as RRRR, Subscriber A will
hear the voice prompt for error during operation.

3-50
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

z The password consists of four digits, excluding * or #.


z In order to avoid misoperation, a new password should be entered twice for confirmation. If required,
one-time input of the password can be achieved by modifying service grammar analysis
configuration data.

3.30 Circular Hunting Service

This service is for PBX subscribers. A hunting group may include several subscriber
groups, each of which is composed of several subscribers in the same module.

21281111
21281112 Subscriber
21281113 Group 0
21281114

21232111
21232112 Subscriber
21232113 Group1 PBX Group 0
21232114

28391111
28391112 Subscriber
28391113 Group2
28391114

Figure 3-1 The structure of a hunting group

Each hunting group has a pilot number. When a subscriber dials the pilot number of
the group, the switch will hunt for an available line in the group to connect the call. If
all the lines in the group are busy, the call will be treated as callee busy.

The hunting mode can be sequential, circular or random.


z The sequential mode means hunting from the first line to the last line in
sequence.
z The circular mode means hunting from the line which was selected last time until
one circle of all lines are hunted.
z The random mode means hunting to each line in random.

3-51
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Each line in the group has an individual discrete number. If the discrete number is
dialed, the call will be connected to the discrete line. If the line is busy, the call will be
treated as callee busy.

3.31 CLIR Booking Default

By default, the caller number is not displayed to the callee. But it will be displayed by
adding the prefix to display the caller number before the called number.

You can use the command: ADD ST or MOD ST to set the "CLIR booking default"
authority, the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".

3.32 CLIR Override

I. Meaning

With this service registered, the callee can override the CLIR set by the caller to
display the caller number.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the authority of "CLIR override" (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Caller with the authority of “CLIR”

B Callee with the authority of “CLIP” and “CLIR override”


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A dials B’s number
Subscriber A’s number is displayed on the phone set of Subscriber
B even though A has “CLIR” authority
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3-52
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A’s number is 8883850 and Subscriber B’s number is 8883851,
the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
ringing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883851
Subscriber A’s number 8883850 is displayed on Subscriber B’s
phone set even though A has “CLIR” authority
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
CLIR is to be used in coordination with CLIP.

3.33 CLIR Reject

With this service, the call will be rejected if the callee registers the CLIP service and
the caller registers the CLIR service.

Before the use of the service, the subscriber should have the "CLIR reject" authority
(you can use the command: ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), the service has been
registered in the "supplementary service".

3-53
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.34 Co-Group Pickup

I. Meaning

If some subscribers belong to a same pickup subgroup of a certain group, dialing


relevant prefix can pick up other telephones in this subgroup.

II. Setting conditions

1) The subscriber has the "co-group pickup in Centrex" authority (you can use the
command: ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".
2) The relevant subscribers in the same Centrex group of the same module are
included to the same subgroup.
3) The relevant subscribers have been configured with the co-group pickup right
through dialing *11#. For example, when the telephone of subscriber B rings,
subscriber A in the same subgroup can dial *11# to answer the call for
subscriber B. And the answered call belongs to the subscriber who telephone
rings first in the same subgroup.

Note:
z To use the co-group pickup service, you need not designate the extension number. If multiple
telephones ring simultaneously, the calls will be answered according to the ringing sequence.
z Only the calls to the subscribers in the same subgroup can be answered.

3.35 Collect Call

I. Meaning

Collect call is also called DIC/DLC service. DIC refers to long distance collect call;
DLC refers to local collect call, which needs no support by Intelligent Network (IN).

9+Area code+ Number anaylsis, deleting 9


A
Subscriber number
Area code + Subscriber number
Originating office Billing office Terminating office

Figure 3-2 Diagram of DIC/DLC call

3-54
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

In view of function, a call will pass originating office, billing office and terminating
office. Originating office is where the caller locates, and terminating office is where the
callee locates. Billing office performs the billing function.

Originating office and billing office can be the same office, and so are billing office and
terminating office. Or originating office, billing office and terminating office are all the
same office.

For a billing office, the called prefix should be set to "9" (for Brazilian standard, 9 is
the access code of DIC/DLC service, and the same below), the service type
corresponding to the prefix is "basic service", and the service attribute is "collect call".
In addition, it is also necessary to set number change, to delete the initial digit of the
called number (that is, 9), and to set the reanalysis of the number after conversion.

If the caller is not in the billing office, that is, the originating office and the billing office
are not the same one, the offices prior to the billing office (including the originating
office) should set "9" as an ordinary toll call prefix. The route corresponding to the
routing code of the prefix should be the one to the billing office. However, the routine
number deletion will not be executed.

II. Setting conditions

This service needs no registration or authority requirement. It can be used if only the
data are configured.

III. Operation

1) For caller
z Dial 9+country number of the callee (area code + subscriber number).
z Hear the waiting tone and prompt tone after the callee hooks off.
z Talk with the callee (no charge on caller).
2) For callee (in the area supporting DIC/DLC)
z Hear the waiting tone and prompt tone after hooking off.
z Hang up before the prompt tone ends to release this call if the callee is unwilling
to pay for the call.
z Hold the call and begin to talk after the prompt tone ends if the callee is willing to
pay for the call.
3) For trunk circuit from the originating office (caller) to the billing office
z The address information transmitted is 9+country number of the callee (area
code + subscriber number).
z For channel associated signaling, the II signal transmitted is the real calling type.
4) For trunk circuit from the billing office to the terminating office (callee)
z The address information transmitted is the country number of the callee (area
code + subscriber number) or the subscriber number.
z For channel associated signaling, II-8 message is transmitted.

3-55
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

5) For offices prior to the billing office (from the originating office to the billing office)
Restrict this call if the area where the callee is located does not support DIC/DLC;
otherwise, transmit it transparently. Generally, if an area does not support DIC/DLC
call, data restriction can be carried out directly at end office or tandem office. If this
area supports DIC/DLC call, data restriction should be made at the billing office.
6) If the office where the callee is located does not support DIC/DLC call
z If there is collect call indication (II-8 or Bit M=1) during call setup, B7 or REL
message shall be returned from the office where the callee is located.
z If there isn't collect call indication (II-8 or Bit M=0) during call setup, the callee will
return dual answer or short answer.
7) For billing office
z Forwardly transmit collect call indication when 9+ country number of the callee
(area code + subscriber number) is received.
z Backwardly transmit B5 when B7 (reject collect call) is received.
z Backwardly transmit B5 or REL and clear forward when dual answer or short
answer is received (that is, the forward office does not support Collect Call).
z Send waiting tone and prompt tone to the both parties when answer signal is
received.
z Set up conversation if synchronous signal from the announcement playing
equipment (SIG) is received again.

IV. Example

1) Service registration
Null.
2) Service operation
z Suppose Office A is the billing office. Set 9 as the prefix of collect call service.
Subscribers X and Y are in the Office A. The number of subscriber Y is ABCD.
Operation Expected result
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears
the ring back tone.
1. Subscriber X dials 9ABCD. 2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
3. Subscriber Y or X hangs up time, the Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the
within 12 seconds after Y hooks prompt tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND
off. THE CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. The call ends, and a bill with the conversation duration of 0 is
generated.

3-56
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears


the ring back tone.
1. Subscriber X dials 9ABCD. 2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
3. Subscriber Y holds the call for time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
more than 12 seconds. tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
4. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
after M seconds’ conversation. 3. Subscribers X and Y talk with each other.
4. A collect call bill with the conversation duration of M seconds
is generated.

z Office A is set with the route to Office B (R2 or No. 7). The prefix is 9, and
Subscriber X is in Office A. Office B is the billing office. Set 9 as the prefix of
Collect Call service. Subscriber Y is in Office B. The number of Subscriber Y is
ABCD. PQ is the area code of the office where Subscriber Y is located.
Operation Expected result
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears
the ring back tone.
1. Subscriber X dials 9PQABCD. 2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
3. Subscriber Y or X hangs up time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
within 12 seconds after Y hooks tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
off. CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. The call ends, and a bill with the conversation duration of 0 is
generated at office B.

1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears


the ring back tone.
1. Subscriber X dials 9PQABCD. 2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
3. Subscriber Y holds the call for time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
more than 12 seconds. tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
4. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
after M seconds’ conversation. 3. Subscribers X and Y talk with each other.
4. A collect call bill with the conversation duration of M seconds
is generated.

z Office A is set with the route to Office B (R2 or No. 7). The prefix is 9, and
subscriber X is in Office A. Office B is the billing office. Set 9 as the prefix of
Collect Call service. Subscriber Y is in Office C. The number of Subscriber Y is
ABCD. PQ is the area code of the office where Subscriber Y is located.

3-57
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing tone, and subscriber X hears
the ring back tone.
1. Subscriber X dials 9PQABCD. 2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
3. Subscriber Y or X hangs up time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
within 12 seconds after Y hooks tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
off. CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
3. The call ends, and a bill with the conversation duration of 0 is
generated at Office B.
1. Subscriber Y hears the ringing, and subscriber X hears the
ring back tone.
1. Subscriber X dials 9PQABCD. 2. Subscriber Y hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
tone "CALL COLLECT. IN ORDER TO ACCEPT THE CALL,
2. Subscriber Y hooks off.
STAY ON THE LINE AFTER IDENTIFICATION"; at the same
3. Subscriber Y holds the call for time, Subscriber X hears the waiting tone and then the prompt
more than 12 seconds. tone "AFTER THE SIGNAL, TELL YOUR NAME AND THE
CITY YOU ARE SPEAKING FROM".
4. Subscriber Y or X hangs up
after M seconds’ conversation. 3. Subscribers X and Y talk with each other.
4. A collect call bill with the conversation duration of M seconds
is generated.

3) Service cancellation
Null.

Note:
The prefix "9" indicating DIC/DLC can be modified upon customer's requirement .

3.36 Conference

I. Meaning

This service is used for the communication among three or more parties.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CONF" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of
command ADD CNACLD.

3-58
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B, C Callees
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the telephone Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
number of Subscriber B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber B hears the conference convening tone
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
Subscriber C hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscribers A, B and C talk with each other
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
The other subscribers listen to the conening tone of
Subscriber A dials a number
telephone conference
If Subscriber A presses the hook after Subscriber A resumes to talk with all the attendants after
dialing failure hearing the busy tone
3 seconds after Subscriber A's dialing Subscriber A automatically returns to the telephone
failure conference
If no reply is heard after Subscriber A Subscriber A presses the hook to return to the telephone
dials a number successfully conference
If Subscriber A presses the hook after
Subscriber A returns to the telephone conference
dialing a number successfully
If Subscriber A dials a number
successfully and the called party The new subscriber join in the telephone conference
hooks off

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-59
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

IV. Example

If Subscriber B's number is 8883850 and Subscriber C's number is 8883851, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
Subscriber A dials 8883850
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber B hears the conference convening tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C
Subscriber A dials 8883851
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscribers A, B and C talk with each other
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
The other subscribers listen to the conening tone of
Subscriber A dials a number
telephone conference
If Subscriber A presses the hook after Subscriber A resumes to talk with all the attendants after
dialing failure hearing the busy tone
3 seconds after Subscriber A's dialing Subscriber A automatically returns to the telephone
failure conference
If no reply is heard after Subscriber A Subscriber A presses the hook to return to the telephone
dials a number successfully conference
If Subscriber A presses the hook after
Subscriber A returns to the telephone conference
dialing a number successfully
If Subscriber A dials a number
successfully and the called party hooks The new subscriber join in the telephone conference
off

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z This service takes precedence over the three-party service.

3-60
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

z Each subscriber can register four groups of conference calls, but can only start one of them, and the
maximum number of members in each group is 6.

3.37 Conference Floating Allowance

Not supported up to now.

3.38 Conference Incoming Call

I. Meaning

With this service registered, the convener will have the right to receive or reject the
incoming calls while the telephone conference is being held.

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber with the "conference incoming call" authority

B Ordinary subscriber

C Ordinary subscriber

D Ordinary subscriber

E Ordinary subscriber

The telephone conference, which was convened by Subscriber A and participated by


Subscribers B and C, is being held.
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber D dials Subscriber A's Subscriber A listens to music, and Subscribers B, C and D
number hear the prompt tone of the telephone conference
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *85# Subscribers A, B, C and D begin to talk with each other

3-61
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Subscriber E hooks off Subscriber E hears the dialing tone


Subscriber E dials Subscriber A's Subscriber A listens to music, and Subscribers B, C, D and
number E hear the prompt tone of the telephone conference
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber E hears the busy tone, and Subscribers A, B, C
Subscriber A dials #85#
and D continue to talk

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

A Service subscriber with the "conference incoming call" authority, whose number
is 8883010

B Ordinary subscriber

C Ordinary subscriber

D Ordinary subscriber

E Ordinary subscriber

The telephone conference, which was convened by Subscriber A and participated by


Subscribers B and C, is being held.
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A listens to music, and Subscribers B, C and D
Subscriber D dials 8883010
hear the prompt tone of the telephone conference

Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the dialing tone


Subscriber A dials *85# Subscribers A, B, C and D begin to talk with each other
Subscriber E hooks off Subscriber E hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A listens to music, and Subscribers B, C, D and E
Subscriber E dials 8883010
hear the prompt tone of the telephone conference
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber E hears the busy tone, and Subscribers A, B, C
Subscriber A dials #85#
and D continue to talk

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-62
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.39 Do-not-Disturb

I. Meaning

If Subscriber A has registered this service, when dialing the number of Subscriber A
(the callee) during the time period between service registration and cancellation,
Subscriber B (the caller) will hear the do-not-disturb tone.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "DDS" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

HH Hours set by the subscriber (00~23)

MM Minutes set by the subscriber (00~59)


1) Service registration

3-63
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *56*HHMM# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 156HHMM (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration

Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
You will enjoy the do-not-disturb service without any operations after registration.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #56# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
151156 (on Pulse phone) the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z When the call forwarding services (including call forwarding busy, call forwarding no replay and call
forwarding unconditional) and do-not-disturb service are all registered, the do-not-disturb service will
take precedence.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent service and do-not-disturb service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy and do-not-disturb service.
z When the do-not-disturb service is registered, the call waiting service becomes invalid.
z When the do-not-disturb service is registered, the subscriber can not use the malicious call
identification service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and do-not-disturb service.

3.40 Custom Local Area Signaling Service

I. Meaning

The Custom Local Area Signaling Service (CLASS) in Colombia falls into the
following three types:
z Distinctively Ring (DR): With this service, when the specified numbers call in, the
ring is distinctive from the common one.

3-64
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

The DR service involves three calling number tables, each of which can be set with
10 calling numbers. A calling number supports a maximum of 16 digits. The calling
numbers in each table corresponds to one ringing mode, which can be set with the
SET CLASSCFG command. When you set up a call with a number in the calling
number table to a callee who has registered the DR service, the ringing is the
distinctive one set with the SET CLASSCFG command.

The Centrex subscribers cannot enjoy the DR service. When the callee has the
calling line identification presentation (CLIP) authority and selects the frequency shift
keying (FSK) mode to display the calling number, not all subscriber boards can
realize all the distinctive rings and send the calling numbers. For the rings that the
board cannot realize, the FSK ring is played instead. In addition, it is required in some
areas that toll call ring is played for toll calls. In such case, the DR service also cannot
be used.
z Selective Call Transfer (SCT): With this service, a call from a specified number is
transferred to a specified subscriber, while the other calls are not.
The SCT service involves one calling number table, which can be set with 10 sets of
calling numbers and forwarded-to numbers. A calling number supports a maximum of
16 digits, and a forwarded-to number supports a maximum of 24 digits. When you set
up a call with a number in the calling number table to a callee who has registered the
SCT service, the call is transferred to the forwarded-to number which is set to the
calling number group.

The SCT service has a higher priority than the call forwarding on unconditional (CFU)
and the call forwarding on busy (CFB) service. Therefore, when a subscriber in the
SCT calling number table calls an SCT service callee, the SCT service is applied.

When the Centrex subscriber uses the SCT service, the calling number to be
registered must be a long number.
z Remote Control of Supplementary Services (RCSS): It is allowed to configure
the supplementary services of this telephone through other telephones, including
service activating and deactivating. Remote settings can be applied only to the
call lock service and call transfer service.
The RCSS service is only applicable to dual-tone dialing of ST, V5, and DSL
subscribers. It supports such services as call restriction, call forwarding (CFU, CFB
and CFNR), wake-up, do-not-disturb, distinctive ringing (DR) and selective call
transfer (SCT).

The configuration and usage of supplementary services of the switch is not affected
by the RCSS service. That is, the operations of configuring services through a remote
phone set and the local phone set are the same.

Note for DR and SCT service:

3-65
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

1) The two services can only support ASL and V5ST subscribers.

2) When the caller uses the calling line identification restriction (CLIR) service or other
services where the caller identification display is restricted, the callee cannot use the
two services.

II. Preparing hardware resource

CLASS requires the intelligent announcement and number receiving functions.


Please prepare the hardware resources for these functions before data configuration.

If you use the SM integrated number-receiving frame for implementing the intelligent
announcement and number receiving functions, the special tone board (SPT) and the
DIN board must be in normal state, and the voice files required by CLASS must have
been loaded to the SPT. Refer to the later part of the document for the description of
voice files.

The announcement resources of the SM card number are provided by the SPT, while
the number receiving resources by the DIN. Each SPT has 128 announcement
channels; each DIN has 16 number-receiving channels. Note that there are two SPTs
in a frame, an active and a standby SPT. In this respect, the SPT differs from the SPD
on the service processing module (SPM). Also, note that, when you configure the
integrated number receiving frame on the SM, the DIN starts working only after the
configuration of the SPT.

If you use the SPD and the shared resource board (SRC) of the AM for implementing
the intelligent announcement and number receiving functions, the SPD and the SRC
must be in normal state, the voice files required by CLASS must have been loaded to
the SPD, and the SRC has the dual tone transmit/receive board (DTR) resources.
Refer to the later part of the document for the description of voice files.

On the SPM, the SPD is for playing announcements, and the SRC for receiving
numbers. Each SPD has 256 channels. On the SPD, you can configure whether to
provide synchronous tone. If the SPD provides synchronous tone, the time slots
seized by synchronous tone amount to 64. Excluding the four time slots seized by the
system, the total number of time slots available to synchronous tone is 188. If the
SPD does not provide synchronous tone, it can provide 252 channels of synchronous
tone resources at most. Each SRC has four DSPs, namely, four resource units. They
can be configured as four kinds of resources: FSK, DTR, MFC and COF. When the
SRC is used for intelligent number receiving, DTR resources must be configured. In
this case, each resource unit can provide 64 number-receiving channels.

Resources on the SPM and SM can be used in the mutual-aid mode. When one
module is short of resources, it can use the resources of another. Therefore, you
need to configure the resource search data first.

3-66
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

III. Configuring service data

z Specifications and Instances for Data Configuration


The CLASS service uses an intelligent service process. Therefore, you must first
configure the data relating to the intelligent network service.
1) Set global parameters of CLASS (SET CLASSCFG)
SET CLASSCFG: MAXP=4, MAXR=255, MAXIA=255, MAXSR=3, MAXRP=2, LI=1,
FIRDT=5, INTDT=5, NECD=YES, NCCD=YES, CAND=K'*, ENDD=K'#, DRM1=NRM,
DRM2=SPEC, DRM3=LONG;

This command is used to set the global parameters of CLASS. Here,

MAXP stands for the maximum length of the password for editing the calling numbers
of the DR and SCT services on a telephone.

MAXR stands for the total number of input errors allowed for editing the DR and SCT
services on a telephone. The value 255 stands for no restriction over input errors.

MAXIA stands for the total number of interactions between the subscriber and the
system when the subscriber edits the DR and SCT services on a telephone. Each
time the system prompts to input is counted as one interaction attempt. The value 255
stands for that the attempts of interaction between the system and the subscriber are
not restricted.

MAXSR stands for the total number of input errors allowed at each interaction attempt
when the subscriber edits the DR and SCT services on a telephone. For example, the
maximum number of errors for entering a table location. The value 255 stands for that
the input errors are not restricted.

MAXRP stands for the number of times for the subscriber to re-enter a password
when editing the DR and SCT services on a telephone.

LI stands for the language index for announcement when the subscriber edits the DR
and SCT services on a telephone. It is set with the ADD INLNG command.

FIRDT stands for the time (in seconds) for the subscriber to enter the first digit of a
number when editing the DR and SCT services on a telephone.

INTDT stands for the time (in seconds) for the subscriber to enter the subsequent
digits when editing the DR and SCT services on a telephone.

NECD stands for whether to support an ending key for the subscriber input when
editing the DR and SCT services on a telephone.

NCCD stands for whether to support a canceling key for the subscriber input when
editing the DR and SCT services on a telephone.

3-67
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

CAND stands for the canceling key for the subscriber input, if the canceling key is
supported, when editing the DR and SCT services on a telephone. For example, to
cancel this input with '*', which is set as the canceling key.

ENDD stands for the ending key for the subscriber input, if the ending key is
supported, when editing the DR and SCT services on a telephone. For example, to
end this input with '#', which is set as the ending key.

DRM1 stands for the ringing mode of calling number table 1 of the DR service.

DRM2 stands for the ringing mode of calling number table 2 of the DR service.

DRM3 stands for the ringing mode of calling number table 3 of the DR service.
2) Add the edit, delete and query access code prefix data of the DR and SCT
services(ADD CNACLD)
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'*20*, CSTP=IN, MINL=4, MAXL=9, CHSC=65535;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'#20*, CSTP=IN, MINL=4, MAXL=9, CHSC=65535;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'*#20*, CSTP=IN, MINL=5, MAXL=10, CHSC=65535;

The above commands respectively add the edit, delete and query access code
prefixes of the calling number tables of the DR and SCT services. The prefixes are
intelligent prefixes. Because a password and '#' must be entered using the DR or SCT
service access prefixes, the maximum length of the prefixes contains a password and
a '#'.
3) Configuring intelligent DP data(ADD TDPCFG)
ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CSC=0, CODE=K'*20*, SKEY=206;

ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CSC=0, CODE=K'#20*, SKEY=207;

ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CSC=0, CODE=K'*#20*, SKEY=208;

When the subscriber edits, deletes or queries the calling number tables of the DR and
SCT services, intelligent access codes and service triggering data are used. The
service keys are 206, 207 and 208 respectively. In the ADD TDPCFG command, the
call source is that of the subscriber of the DR and SCT services. If multiple call source
subscribers need to use the DR service or the SCT service, service triggering data
must be added to each call source with the ADD TDPCFG command.
4) Configure resource capacity(ADD SSPSRC)
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=206, MN=255;

ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=207, MN=255;

ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=208, MN=255;

3-68
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

The service switching point (SSP) dedicated resource capacity concerns a specific
service. It indicates which modules have the resource capacity of this service. In this
command, the value of the module number ranges from 1 to 255. The value 255
means that all modules have the resource capacity of this service. For example, it
indicates through the setting of the above three blocks of data for service keys 206,
207 and 208 that all modules of this office have the resource capacity of this service.
5) Configure resource search data (ADD SRCSRH)
ADD SRCSRH: MDU=10, SRC=BRD, STATE=USE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=1, MDU2=2,
MDU3=3;

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=10, SRC=DIN, STATE=USE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=1, MDU2=2,


MDU3=3;

If the subscribers of module 10 require the synchronous tone and secondary number
receiving resources, which are unavailable on module 10, module 10 applies to other
modules. The above two blocks of data indicate the sequence of the application.

If subscribers of the SM in the field environment require the DR and SCT services,
but the SM has no DIN configured on itself to provide the synchronous tone resources
required by the DR or SCT service, you must configure resource search data for the
SM, so that the SM can apply for resources to the SPM when it needs to play
synchronous tone. It is recommended to use the fixed searching mode. Refer to Table
1 for the module search sequence. Modules 10, 11 and 12 are SM modules that
require synchronous tone, while modules 1, 2 and 3 are SPM modules that can
provide synchronous tone.

Table 1 Example of resource search data

Module First module Second Third module


No. searched module searched
searched

10 1 2 3

11 2 3 1

12 3 1 2

Note: You must enter a valid value for the modules searched. Do not enter a value
such as '255'. In addition, when resources are used across modules, a large quantity
of messages is transmitted between modules. These messages, together with traffic
statistics and daily inter-module messages sent and received, make the
communication between modules tough, if the communication rate is low. Therefore,
for the SM, it is better to set the inter-module communication rate to 512 Kbit/s.
6) Configure the language type index data (ADD INLNG)
ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;

3-69
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

This command sets the type of language type index 1 to English. When the DR and
SCT services are used, the system prompts you to set the language type index with
the SET CLASSCFG command. But the language type of this language type index is
set with the ADD INLNG command.
7) Configure the software parameter (MOD SFP)
MOD SFP: ID=P127, VAL="0xefff";

The CLASS service adopts the built-in SCP mode to implement the IVR process of
the intelligent network service. But the system does not support the built-in SCP and
the standard intelligent network service simultaneously. It uses different software
parameters for the built-in SCP and the standard intelligent network service.
Therefore, bit 12 of software parameter 127 must be changed to bit 0.
8) Add the SRC number-receiving resources for a module exchange (ADD
CDBFUNC/MOD SRCCFG/MNT BRD)
ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=SPD, BG=0;

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=DTR, BG=0;

MOD SRCCFG: FN=18, BN=4, DSP1=DTR;

MNT BRD: MN=0, F=18, SN=4, OP=ACT;

Because CLASS requires synchronous tone and number receiving in the DTR mode,
CDB must have the SPD and DTR distribution functions. In the site environment, first
use the LST CDBFUNC command to check if the SPD and DTR distribution functions
have been configured in the CDB. If not, use the first two commands in the above
application instance to configure the two functions.

Then, use the LST SRCCFG command to check if the DTR resources have been
configured for the SRC board. If not, use the MOD SRCCFG command to make
modifications, enabling some DSP units to provide the DTR function. Remember to
activate the board with the MNT BRD command after using the MOD SRCCFG
command.
9) Add an integrated number-receiving frame for a standalone exchange to use the
CLASS service (ADD BDIN)
ADD BDIN: MN=1, F=4, LN=0, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=0, N1=12, N2=13, N3=14,
N4=15, HW1=4, HW2=6, HW3=8, HW4=10, BV=CQ02;

Because synchronous tone and secondary number receiving are required when the
subscriber edits, deletes and queries the calling number table in the IVR mode,
integrated number-receiving frame must be added for a standalone exchange to
provide these resources when using the CLASS service.

Note: The ADD BDIN command is used to configure the intelligent integrated
number-receiving frame. In the command parameter, BV stands for the version of the

3-70
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

SPT board. Select 'CQ02' for BV. NOD and HW in the parameter must be consistent
with the actual physical connection.
10) Modify the module parameter table (MOD SMP)
MOD SMP: MN=10, ID=ID53, VAL=20;

MOD SMP: MN=10, ID=ID54, VAL=30;

This instance means to modify module 10 to support a maximum number of 20 DR


service subscribers and a maximum number of 30 SCT service subscribers. After
modifying the module parameter, remember to format the data with the FMT
command before reloading this module.
z Setting subscriber authority
Related commands: MOD NSR, ADD/MOD ST, ADD/MOD V5ST.

Use the LST NSVUSER command to check the subscribers and the registration of
the DR and SCT services in this office.

IV. Operation

z DR and SCT service


1) The DR and SCT services are available once they are activated on a telephone,
or on an MML interface with the REG NSV command.
2) The prefixes for activating and deactivating the DR and SCT services can be set
with the ADD CNACLD command. To set prefixes, select 'Supplementary
service' for the service category; select 'Activate distinctively ring service',
'Cancel distinctively ring service', 'Activate selective call transfer service' and
'Cancel selective call transfer service' for the service attribute.
3) The subscriber can edit, delete and query the calling number tables of the DR
and SCT services on a telephone by Interactive Voice Response (IVR) in an
intelligent interaction mode or on an MML interface with the REG NSV
command.
4) For editing the calling number tables of the DR and SCT services, the password
of the DR service or the SCT service is identical with that of the outgoing call
barring. The password can be modified with the 'Call out password' parameter of
the commands MOD ST and MOD V5ST, or with the command MOD PSWD.
5) For all calls including forwarded-to calls, while applying the DR and SCT services,
the system compares the calling number and takes the number arriving at the
callee as the correct number. Therefore, if the number sent to a subscriber has
an area code, the calling number registered in the calling number table for the
DR and SCT services must also have an area code.
6) While performing editing, deleting and querying operations to the calling number
table for the CLASS service through a telephone, the subscriber need not enter a
special number, such as '#', at the end of a number if the number has reached
the maximum number of digits allowed for the corresponding procedure. For

3-71
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

example, when selecting a service category, the subscriber can only enter a
one-digit number. If the subscriber exceeds the time for entering a number, and
yet the number entered is valid (for example, when the subscriber has just
entered the one-digit number '1' for a table location, the time is up), then the
system regards the input as valid. Each input operation of the subscriber
indicates a number cancelled or ended. Such a number can be configured with
the SET CLASSCFG command. But it must be globally unique without being
ended with '*' or '#' at a time.
7) The DR and SCT services do not support new service billing.
z RCSS service
Only a subscriber in this exchange can use this service. Any subscriber in this
exchange who has this service authority can use this service, without having to
activate it.

V. Announcement principle of CLASS

The CLASS service can be used on both SM and SPM. For using on the SM, the SPT
board in the integrated number-receiving frame can be used for announcement, or
the voice resources on the SPM can be directly used for announcement (in this case,
the resource search data mentioned above must be added). For using on the SPM,
the SPD will be used for announcement.

Therefore, before applying the service, use the LAD SPDVOICE command to load the
synchronous tone files (to be introduced in the following part) to the SPD or SPT.

VI. Voice files of CLASS

When the CLASS subscriber edits, deletes and queries the calling number table in
the IVR mode, the customer service center or the user must provide voice
announcement records as required and load them to the SPD/SPT. The naming
format of voice files is 06LLXXXX.001. In the naming format, 06 stands for the service
type, and LL for the language type in hex. For English, the language type is 0x40. For
other languages, refer to relevant documentation. If other languages are used, the
names of voice files should be modified accordingly. XXXX stands for the specific
voice coding, which is fixed for each kind of announcement. Voice references of
announcements are described in the following table. The last two announcements in
the table may be applicable when restricting the attempts of subscriber interaction or
the total number of errors with the SET CLASSCFG command.

3-72
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Table 2 Correlations between CLASS service contents and voice files

Name of voice file


Voice code in
Voice reference (take English as an
flow chart
example)
A Dial one (1) to edit the first list of distinctive ringing, Dial two (2) 06400082.001
to edit the second list of distinctive ringing. Dial three (3) to edit
the third list of distinctive ringing. Dial four (4) to edit the fourth
list of selective call transfer.
B Dial the desired position 1~10. 06400083.001
C Dial the number of the caller subscriber of distinctive ringing 06400084.001
D Your list has been edited successfully. 06400085.001
E Dial the number of the caller subscriber of selective call 06400086.001
transfer
F Dial the phone number where you want to transfer the call. 06400087.001
G Please dial one (1) to erase a position in the list or dial two (2) 06400088.001
to erase all the lists.
H Please dial one (1) to check one position of the list or dial two 06400089.001
(2) to check all the lists.
J Dial the desired position. 0640008A.001
K Confirm that you want to erase the entire list dialing one (1). 0640008B.001
L(1), M(1), N(1) The position number 0640008C.001
L(2) has the following number 0640008D.001
M(2) The number that caller is 0640008E.001
M(3) The call will be transferred to the number 0640008F.001
N(2), X The indicated position is empty. 06400090.001
P From your phone you can not edit the lists. 06400091.001
Q The dialed personal code is wrong. Verify it and dial again. 06400092.001
S You have delayed the dialing. Verify it and dial again. 06400093.001
T Wrong dialing. Verify it and dial again. 06400094.001
U Your phone doesn't have access to this service, thanks. 06400095.001
Y Your entire list is empty. 06400096.001
RR You exceed the maximal number of attempts for dialing your 06400097.001
personal code. Please be in contact with Telefornica de
Pereira.
For internal use Thank you for using, Bye. 06400009.001
For internal use Sorry, you have surpassed the maximum times for interaction. 06400046.001

3-73
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.41 HONGKONG MWN

Message Waiting Notification (MWN) is a feature which activates and deactivates a


visual indicator on CPE and an audible shutter dialing tone through the telephone
handset to notify the subscriber that a new message (voice or fax) is deposited in
his/her mailbox and waiting for retrieval.

The visual indicator may be as simple as lighting or flashing a Light Emitting Diode
(LED) or as advanced as displaying a special message on a liquid crystal display.

When the subscriber hooks off, shutter dialing tone will be heard if the Message
Waiting Information (MWI) of the subscriber is set to “ON”. Normal dialing tone will be
provided if the MWI of the subscriber is set to “OFF”.

Note:
z The activation/deactivation of visual MWI and shutter dialing tone is triggered by the Voice Mailbox
(VM) and controlled by the switch. No customer procedure is required.
z A special phone set (CID-II) is need in this service.

3.42 Hot Line

I. Meaning

With the hot line service registered, if a subscriber does not dial any number within 5
seconds after hooking off, the telephone set will be automatically connected to a
previously specified callee. If there is no registration of the hot line service, the caller
will still hear the dialing tone after 5 seconds.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "hot line" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

TN Hotline number (Subscriber B's number)

3-74
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
Subscriber A dials *52*TN#
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A does not dial any Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears
number within 5 seconds the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
Subscriber A dials #52#
successful service cancellation

Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

IV. Example

Suppose the hot line number set by Subscriber A is 8883850, the operation process is
as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the
Subscriber A dials *52*8883850#
successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

3-75
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A does not dial any Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B
number within 5 seconds hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of the successful
Subscriber A dials #52#
service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z Each subscriber can register only one subscriber for hot line service.
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.43 Immediate Hotline

I. Meaning

After the registration of the "immediate hotline" service, your phone set will
automatically call the designated number whenever you pick up the handset.

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the service attribute of the command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Hotline subscriber whose number is PQABCD

3-76
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

C Another subscriber different from A


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*521*PQABCD# successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A hooks off
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials #521*A’s Subscriber C hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
number # successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber C hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber B’s number is 8883850 and Subscriber A uses a DTMF phone
with the number of 8883851, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*521*8883850# successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation

3-77
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber A hooks off
ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber C hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
#521*8883851# successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber C hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z With the hotline service registered, the subscriber should not apply for the services which restrict
outgoing calls.
z This service cannot be cancelled by the registered phone.

3.44 Inquiry

I. Meaning

When a subscriber (as caller or callee) is in conversation, he/she can call a third party
by pressing the hook to set up a new conversation, and at the same time the previous
conversation party holds on. The subscriber can switch between two conversation
parties by hooking and dialup: release one party or select one party.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber is not required to register this service on phone set, but is only
required to own "inquiry" authority. Service authority can be set by command ADD ST
or MOD ST. Set the national code to Brazil by command SET OFI.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

3-78
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

B Subscriber who is in conversation with Subscriber A first

C Subscriber called by Subscriber A when A and B are in conversation


1) Service registration
The subscriber is not required to register this service on phone set, but is only
required to own "inquiry" authority.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
When Subscribers A and B are in
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber
conversation, Subscriber A presses
B hears the music
the hook
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber C hears the ringing tone, Subscriber A hears the
Subscriber C ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears the music
Subscribers A and C are in conversation, and Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off
hears the music
Subscriber A presses the hook and Subscribers A and B are in conversation, and Subscriber C
then dials "2" hears the music
Subscriber A presses the hook and Subscribers A and C are in conversation, and Subscriber B
then dials "1" hears the busy tone
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Subscriber who is in conversation with Subscriber A first

C Subscriber called by Subscriber A when A and B are in conversation, whose


number is 8883850
1) Service registration
The subscriber is not required to register this service on phone set, but is only
required to own "inquiry" authority.
2) Service operation

3-79
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


When Subscribers A and B are
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber B
in conversation, Subscriber A
hears the music
presses the hook
Subscriber C hears the ringing tone, Subscriber A hears the ring
A dials 8883850
back tone, and Subscriber B hears the music
Subscribers A and C are in conversation, and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber C hooks off
the music
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscribers A and B are in conversation, and Subscriber C hears
and then dials "2" the music
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscribers A and C are in conversation, and Subscriber B hears
and then dials "1" the busy tone
Subscriber C hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

V. Notes for the Operation

Suppose:

A -- Subscriber activating Inquiry service

B --Subscriber who is in conversation with Subscriber A first

C -- Subscriber called by Subscriber A when A and B are in conversation


1) If Subscriber A hangs up when waiting for digit collection after hooking, the
previous hold-on conversation can be resumed in the following way: call
Subscriber A, and if A hooks off before B hangs up or before the protection
duration times out, the conversation between A and B can be resumed.
2) Before a new conversation is established, the subscriber A can return to the
conversation with Subscriber B by hooking to give up calling Subscriber C.
3) After a new conversation is established, the subscriber A can:
z a) Switch between two conversation parties by dialing "2" after hooking;
z b) Release the party currently in conversation by dialing "1" after hooking;
z c) Return to the previous conversation by hooking when hearing the busy tone in
case of dialing timeout after hooking;
z d) Release the hold-on party by dialing "0" after hooking;
z e) Return to the previous conversation by dialing any number except "0", "1" or
"2" after hooking.

3-80
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

4) If Subscriber A hangs up during conversation, the current conversation party will


be released by normal process. At the same time, Subscriber A hears the ringing
tone, and he/she will talk with the previous hold-on party after hooking off.
5) If Subscriber B (or C) hangs up when talking with Subscriber A, he/she will be
released by normal call process. At the same time, Subscriber A can talk with the
rest party by hooking during release.
6) If the hold-on party hangs up, he/she will be released by normal call process
without affecting the ongoing conversation.
7) The switch determines whether the Inquiry call can be originated by analyzing (at
least) the first 4 digits of the inquiry number, so as to limit the Inquiry call to a
certain area.
8) The call barring group number 60003 is designated to restrict CF by local
subscribers. When a local subscriber activates Inquiry service, in addition to the
judgment of outgoing call authority of the subscriber, 60003 will be taken as the
call barring group number of the subscriber to check the outgoing call authority.
9) Bit 9 of the CCB operation parameter 1 determines whether to check Inquiry call
of the subscriber:
= 0, no check;
= 1, use 60003 to query call barring data and check outgoing call authority.

3.45 List Conference

I. Meaning

With this service registered, the subscriber may register the participants of a
telephone conference in a list, and then he/she can convene such a conference by
implementing this list. The subscriber is free to add members to or delete members
from the list. While the list conference is being held, the convener is able to convene
or delete a participant temporarily.

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber with the "list conference" authority

B Ordinary subscriber

C Ordinary subscriber

3-81
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

D Ordinary subscriber

E Ordinary subscriber

k Conference list
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*k*B's number#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
(on DTMF phone) or 181k+B’s number
successful registration of the service
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber B has become a member of conference list k
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*k*C's number #
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
(on DTMF phone) or 181k+C’s number
successful registration of the service
(on Pulse phone)

Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber C has become a member of conference list k


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*k*D's number #
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
(on DTMF phone) or 181k+D’s number
successful registration of the service
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber D has become a member of conference list k

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscribers B, C and D hear the ringing tone
Subscriber A dials *84*k# (on DTMF
simultaneously. After they hook off in turn, subscribers A,
phone) or 184k (on Pulse phone)
B, C and D begin to talk with each other
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, Subscribers
Subscriber A presses the hook B, C and D hear the prompt tone of the telephone
conference
Subscriber E hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A
Subscriber A dials E's number
hears the ring back tone
Subscribers A, B, C, D and E begin to talk with each
Subscriber E hooks off
other
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber B, C, D and E hear the prompt tone of the
conference telephone
Subscriber A dials #82*k*B's number #
Subscriber B hears the busy tone, and Subscribers A, C,
(on DTMF phone) or 151181B's number
D and E begin to talk with each other
(on Pulse phone)

3-82
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber C hangs up Subscribers A, D and E talks
Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers D and E hear the busy tone

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #81*k*B's number #
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
(on DTMF phone) or 151181k+B's
successful cancellation of the service
number (on Pulse phone)

Subscriber A hangs up Conference list k includes Subscribers C and D


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #83*k# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 183k (on Pulse phone) successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Conference list k is deleted

IV. Example

A Service subscriber with the "list conference" authority, whose number is


8883010

B Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883020

C Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883030

D Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883040

E Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883050

Conference list number (k) is 0.


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*0*8883020#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
(on DTMF phone) or 18108883020
registration of the service
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber B has become a member of conference list 0
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone

3-83
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A dials *81*0*8883030#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
(on DTMF phone) or 18108883030
registration of the service
(on Pulse phone)

Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber C has become a member of conference list 0


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *81*0*8883040#
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of successful
(on DTMF phone) or 18108883040
registration of the service
(on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber D has become a member of conference list 0

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscribers B, C and D hear the ringing tone simultaneously.
Subscriber A dials *84*0# (on DTMF
After they hook off in turn, Subscribers A, B, C and D begin
phone) or 1840 (on Pulse phone)
to talk with each other
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, Subscribers B, C
Subscriber A presses the hook
and D hear the prompt tone of conference telephone
Subscriber E hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears
Subscriber A dials 8883050
the ring back tone
Subscriber E hooks off Subscribers A, B, C, D and E begin to talk with each other
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber
Subscriber A presses the hook B, C, D and E hear the prompt tone of the conference
telephone
Subscriber A dials #82*0*8883020#
Subscriber B hears the busy tone, and Subscribers A, C, D
(on DTMF phone) or
and E begin to talk with each other
1511818883020 (on Pulse phone)

Subscriber C hangs up Subscribers A, D and E talks


Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers D and E hear the busy tone

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #81*0*8883020# (on
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
DTMF phone) or 15118108883020 (on
successful cancellation of the service
Pulse phone)
Subscriber A hangs up Conference list 0 includes Subscribers C and D
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone

3-84
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A dials #83*0# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 1830 (on Pulse phone) successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Conference list 0 is deleted

Note:
Each subscriber shall have at most 4 conference lists (0~3).

3-85
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z Before using a service, carry out the ADD CNACLD command to add the service prefix. Otherwise,
the service will be unavailable.
z Both the administrator and authorized subscriber can activate and deactivate a service. That is, the
administrator can carry out the REG NSV command to activate a service and the RMV NSV
command to deactivate a service, and an authorized subscriber can activate and deactivate a
service on a telephone through dialing the access code. Only the last setting is effective.

3.46 Malicious Call Identification

I. Meaning

After the registration of this service, if the subscriber receives malicious calls, he/she
will be able to find out the number(s) of the telephone set(s) from which the malicious
calls are originated.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "MCID" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Caller
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service.
2) Service operation

3-86
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off after hearing the ringing tone Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks and dials *33# (on DTMF phone) Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement
or directly dials "4" or above numbers (on Pulse tone of the successful malicious call
phone) while talking identification, and the BAM generates alarms
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z When the do-not-disturb service is registered, the subscriber cannot use malicious call identification
service.
z When the absent subscriber service is registered, the subscriber cannot use malicious call
identification service.
z When the malicious call identification service is registered, even if the caller does not provide his/her
number, the Telecommunication Office can still find out the number of the subscriber who has made
the malicious calls.
z The subscriber can trace the malicious call during or after the conversation.
z The subscriber can hear the prompt voice "The number you traced is …" or music when the
malicious call identification is successful. After the music, you can ask the office administrator for the
traced number.
z The duration of the prompt voice (music) varies from 20 to 30 seconds according to the length of the
traced number. The original talk before the trace will be automatically restored when the prompt
voice ends.
z For the subscriber using DTMF phone, the original talk will be restored if he/she does not dial after
hooking or he/she hooks during the play of the prompt voice.
z The switch administration system of the office records the malicious call identification cases and
operator can query the records by use of the command LST ALMMAL.

3.47 Message Waiting Indication

This is a Brazilian service. With this service, the switch forwards the calls to the voice
mailbox automatically, records the message and then sends prompts. The callee will
first listen to the special dialing tone (600) after hooking off and then hear the
message on prompt by dialing the access code to the voice mailbox. When the

3-87
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

message ends, the voice mailbox sends the stopping message tone (610), on which
the switch stops playing the special dialing tone.

The MWI service does not need registering on the phone. Once having the authority,
a subscriber can use it.

Note:
z The subscriber will listen to the wrong number tone after directly dialing the prefix 610 or 600.
z Currently, this service supports only TUP and ISUP signaling.
z Before the use of the service, the subscriber should have the "message waiting indication" authority
(you can use the command: ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".

3.48 No Disturb When Calling

I. Meaning

With this service, other subscribers will not be able to intrude, supervise and
disconnect the call connection while the subscriber of this service is in the talking
state.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "no disturb when calling" authority (you can use the command:
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Ordinary subscriber, he has "do not disturb while talking" authority, his number
is PQABCD;

B Ordinary subscriber

C Operator

Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber B

1) Service operation

3-88
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber C hears the busy tone, Subscriber A continues
*80*PQABCD# to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C disconnect failed

Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone

Subscriber C dials Subscriber C hears the busy tone, Subscriber A continues


*99*PQABCD# to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C supervision failed
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber C hears the busy tone, Subscriber A continues
*70*PQABCD# to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C intrusion failed

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the PTT for canceling this authority.

IV. Example

A Ordinary subscriber, he has the "do not disturb while talking" authority, his
number is 8883010;

B Ordinary subscriber, his number is 8883020

C Operator

Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber B.

1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the busy tone, Subscriber A continues
Subscriber C dials *80*8883010#
to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C disconnect failed
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the busy tone, Subscriber A continues
Subscriber C dials *99*8883010#
to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C supervision failed
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone

3-89
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber C hears the busy tone, Subscriber A continues
Subscriber C dials *70*8883010#
to talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hangs up Subscriber C intrusion failed

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the PTT for canceling this authority.

3.49 Number Barring

I. Meaning

Number barring refers to call originating restriction. With this service, outgoing calls to
the restricted numbers will be barred.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "number barring" authority (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber using a DTMF phone with the password of SSSS

TN Telephone number to be barred


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*64*SSSSTN# successful registration of the service

Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials TN Subscriber A hears the non-authorization tone
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3-90
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
#64*SSSSTN# successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A’s password is 1234 and the number to be barred is 8883850,
the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*64*12348883850# successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
If Subscribers A dials 8883850 Subscriber A hears the non-authorization tone
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
#64*12348883850# successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-91
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z When this service is registered, you will hear the non-authorization tone if you dial the barred
number.
z A subscriber can register as many as 100 barred numbers.
z To cancel all the barred numbers, dial #641*SSSS#.

3.50 Number Incomplete

I. Meaning

The subscriber registered with this service sets the complete number flag to "No", and
then his/her number (or name) will not be displayed on the callee's phone set even if
the callee has CLIP authority.

II. Setting conditions

This service can be activated only if the subscriber has the "number incomplete"
authority. Service authority can be set by command ADD ST or MOD ST.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Callee registered with CLIP service


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for the "number incomplete" authority.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears the ring
Subscriber A dials the
back tone. The number of Subscriber A will not be displayed on the
number of Subscriber B
phone set of B
Subscriber B hooks off Subscribers A and B talk with each other
Subscriber B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation

3-92
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Callee, registered with CLIP service, whose number is 8883850


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for the "number incomplete" authority.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears
Subscriber A dials 8883850 the ring back tone. The number of Subscriber A will not be
displayed on the phone set of B

Subscriber B hooks off Subscribers A and B talk with each other


Subscriber B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3.51 Operator Call Barring

I. Meaning

The subscriber registered with this service can prohibit the international incoming
calls from operators speaking English, French, German, Spanish or Russian.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber is not required to register this service on phone set, but is only
required to own "operator call barring" authority. Service authority can be set by
command ADD ST or MOD ST.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B International operator

3-93
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for the "operator call barring" authority.
2) Service operation
When operator B makes an international toll call to Subscriber A, he/she will hear the
barring tone.
3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3.52 Operator Interrupt

I. Meaning

With this service, the operator can forcedly disconnect the calls to the subscribers in
the local group who are talking over the line.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the service attribute(operator interrupt) of
command ADD CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Subscriber whose number is PQABCD

C Local ordinary subscriber


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation

3-94
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber
Subscriber B B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement music,
Subscriber A dials *80*PQABCD# Subscriber B hears the forced disconnection tone, and
Subscriber C hears the busy tone
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber B’s number is 8883850 and he/she uses a DTMF phone, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
8883850 ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement music, Subscriber B hears
*80*8883850# the forced disconnection tone, and Subscriber C hears the busy tone
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-95
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z If Subscriber C is another operator or toll call subscriber, Subscriber A will hear the busy tone. It is
not allowed to use the "operator forced disconnection" in this case.
z After the successful forced disconnection, Subscriber B hears the forced disconnection tone, while
the other party hears the busy tone. If the forced disconnection is failed, Subscriber B will not be
affected and the operator will hear the busy tone.
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.53 Operator Intrusion

I. Meaning

This service entitles the operator to break in the converation of the local subscribers
who are talking over the line.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Operator

B Local ordinary subscriber whose number is PQABCD

C Local ordinary subscriber


1) Service registration
Apply for the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation

3-96
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber
Subscriber B B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber
Subscriber A dials * 70 * PQABCD #
B talks with Subscriber A

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

If Subscriber B’s number is 8883850 and Subscriber A uses a DTMF phone, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber
Subscriber C dials 8883850
B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber
Subscriber A dials *70*8883850#
B talks with Subscriber A

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z If Subscriber C is another local operator or toll call subscriber, Subscriber A will hear the busy tone.
It is not allowed to use "operator insertion" in this case.
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3-97
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.54 Operator Login

With this service, a Centrex subscriber can change his/her attribute into operator, so
he/she can have the function of the operator. Its service prefix is generally set to
"*65#".

Only the Centrex subscriber can carry out operator registration and cancellation.
When the subscriber is registered as operator, he/she can implement monitoring,
insertion or deletion operations.

When the subscriber is registered as operator, he/she temporarily owns the operator
attributes. In setting subscriber data next time, the operator attributes will be lost.

The pulse phone cannot use this service.

3.55 Operator Monitoring

I. Meaning

This service entitles the operator to monitor the calls made by the local office
subscribers.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber is an operator (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD ST to set
it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Operator

B Subscriber whose number is PQABCD

C Local ordinary subscriber


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-98
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials the number of Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber B the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C, and Subscriber A hears
*99*PQABCD# the conversation between Subscribers B and C
Subscriber A hangs up The conversation keeps on

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber B’s number is 8883850, and he/she uses a DTMF phone, the
operation process is below:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber C dials 8883850
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
If Subscriber A dials Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C Subscriber A hears the
*99*8883850# conversation between Subscribers B and C
Subscriber A hangs up The conversation keeps on

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-99
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z If Subscriber C is another local operator or toll call subscriber, Subscriber A will hear the busy tone.
It is not allowed to use "operator monitoring" in this case.
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.
z The monitoring duration is 60 seconds. Monitoring is terminated after 60 seconds and the
conversation the monitored subscribers will not be affected.
z The operator can only monitor the local calls of the ordinary subscribers.
z During the monitoring, Subscribers B and C can not hear the speech of Subscriber A.

3.56 Outgoing Call Barring

I. Meaning

When a subscriber has "Outgoing Call barring" service registered, he/she can prohibit
the calls to a certain range of numbers. Anyone who dials such numbers will hear the
non-authorization tone.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "outgoing call barring" authority (you can use the command
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

K 0-15 (acquiring authorities accordingly based on data)

SSSS Password of the subscriber


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
If the password is correct, Subscriber A hears the
Subscriber A dials *54*SSSSK# (on DTMF
acknowledgement tone of the successful service
phone) or 154SSSSK (on Pulse phone)
registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation

3-100
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

When you dials a number that is barred on a telephone set registered with the
outgoing call barring service, you will hear the prompt tone.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #54*SSSSK# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 151154SSSSK the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

If the password is 1234 and the call-out authority K is 1, the operation process is as
follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
If the password is correct, Subscriber A hears the
Subscriber A dials *54*12341# (on DTMF
acknowledgement tone of the successful service
phone) or 15412341 (on Pulse phone)
registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When you dials a number that is barred on a telephone set registered with the
outgoing call barring service, you will hear the prompt tone.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #54*12341# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or dials 15115412341 the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-101
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z When registering, verifying or canceling this service, the subscriber does not have the authority for
the outgoing call barring service, the non-authorization tone is heard.
z For the corresponding relationship between K value and the outgoing call authorization, refer to the
data.
z Registered with the hotline service, the subscriber should not apply for the services which restrict
outgoing calls.
z Registered with the three-party service, the subscriber should not apply for the services which
restrict outgoing calls.

3.57 Park on

I. Meaning

On registering this service, subscribers can restrict outgoing calls (excluding


emergency calls) and local incoming calls for the temporary, and control whether to
allow incoming toll calls by software parameter.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "Park on" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "service attribute" of
command ADD CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

SSSS Subscriber A's password


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *31*SSSS# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or 131SSSS (on pulse phone) the successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

3-102
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
The call can be put through, and the conversation
Subscriber A makes an emergency call
quality is normal
Subscriber A calls other subscribers (not for
Subscriber A hears call barring prompt tone
emergency calls)
Other local subscribers call Subscriber A The caller hears do-not-disturb prompt tone
Other subscribers make toll calls to Software parameters determine whether to access
Subscriber A the call; otherwise, do-not-disturb tone will be heard

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #31*SSSS# (on DTMF Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
phone) or #131SSSS (on pulse phone) the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service canceled

Note:
On registering this service, whether to allow incoming toll calls is controlled by the following parameter:
(OVS_CCB_PARA1)
BIT 11: whether to prohibit toll calls (ALLOW_TOLL_CALLIN)
=1: toll call prohibited (by default)
=0: toll call allowed

IV. Example

Refer to operation.

3.58 Password Call

I. Meaning

When an ordinary subscriber does not have the toll call authority, this service enables
the subscriber to make toll calls by entering correct password.

3-103
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "password call" authority (you can use the command ADD ST
or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber whose password is SSSS, without toll call authority

PQABCD Toll call number


1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *42*SSSS# (on DTMF
Subscriber A hears the second dialing tone
phone) or 142SSSS (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A dials PQABCD Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
The callee hooks off Both parties talk with each other
Subscriber A hangs up The talk ends

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A's password is 1234, who has no toll call authority, and the
callee's number is 021-56608000, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *42*1234# (on DTMF
Subscriber A hears the second dialing tone
phone) or 1421234 (on Pulse phone)
Subscriber A dials 021-56608000 Subscriber A hears the ring back tone
The callee hooks off Both parties talk with each other
Subscriber A hangs up The talk ends

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-104
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
Password call can override all the outgoing authority checks. For example, if a subscriber does not have
the outgoing call authority, he/she can make outgoing calls through this service.

3.59 Permanent Booking CLIR

I. Meaning

With this service, the caller number is not displayed to the callee, even if the prefix to
display the caller number is added before the called number.

II. Setting conditions

(1) Use command ADD/MOD ST to set the service authority.

(2) The caller has the CLIR right and has registered it.

(2) The caller has the Permanent booking CLIR right.

(3) The callee has the CLIP right.

III. Operation

This service requires no beforehand registration but the relevant rights.

When the caller dials *68DN, the caller number will not be displayed on the called
telephone.

Note:
Only when the callee has the CLIR override right, can the caller number be displayed.

3-105
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.60 Play Charge Information

I. Meaning

The Play Charge Information service is for the inquiry of call charge. A subscriber can
know the charge of his last call and his total call charge through dialing a prefix after
the completion of a call.

The Play Charge Information service is available only for subscribers of an end office
and only ST, DSL and V5ST subscribers can use it.

II. Data configuration

z Configuring the prefix


Carry out the ADD CNACLD command to configure the prefix of the Play Charge
Information service. Set the [SERVICE CATEGORY] parameter to "supplementary
service" and the [SERVICE ATTRIBUTE] parameter to "DCHGI(query charging
information by DTMF)". The [SERVICE SEQUENCE NUMBER] parameter ranges
from 0 to 5. If this parameter is set to a value greater than 5, subscribers will hear the
busy tone after dialing the prefix. The values 0~5 stand for the following meanings:

0: Announces the meter count of the last call of a subscriber.

1: Announces the total meter count of a subscriber.

2: Announces the meter count of the last call and the total meter count of a subscriber
(including 0 and 1).

3: Announces the charge of the last call of a subscriber.

4: Announces the total call charge of a subscriber.

5: Announces the charge of the last call and total call charge of a subscriber
(including 3 and 4).

The default data has configured the prefixes 1800~1805 to send the above six voice
announcements respectively.
z Setting the maximum number of service subscribers
Carry out the MOD SMP/LST MDU command to set the maximum number of tuples
of the Play Charge Information service dynamic table. The maximum number of
tuples of the table determines the maximum number of subscribers who can
successfully use the Play Charge Information service. Set the [PARAMETER] to
"maximum number of Play Charge Information service subscribers". The default value
is 200.

After the modification of the maximum number of tuples, format the data and load it,
then the modification takes effect. Therefore, it is recommended to set a proper

3-106
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

maximum number of tuples for the table according to actual requirements at first so
as to avoid reloading the system.
z Backing up data
Carry out the BKP NSV command to back up the Play Charge Information service
data in the active MPU/SPC board to the BAM. After resetting or re-startup, the host
will automatically load the Play Charge Information service data from the BAM to the
foreground. Set the [SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE ID] parameter to "play charge
info".

Bit 10 of the software parameter P55 controls whether the switch supports real-time
backup.

=1: Not support (default value). The BAM will back up supplementary service data at
specified intervals.

=0: Support
z Configuring voice announcement data
When voice channels are adequate, the SM uses the SIG board to play voice
announcements and supports simultaneous voice announcement of 20 channels,
while the SPM supports simultaneous voice announcement of 200 channels.

When no voice channel is available for a call, the switch first plays a voice
announcement like "The line is busy now. Please try again later".

Carry out the MOD SIGSET command to modify the voice configuration data of some
supplementary services in the SIG/SPD board. The Play Charge Information service
uses the signal indexes 95 and 96 (that is, TID) whose [SEND SOUND TYPE]
parameter is set to "synchronous signal". By default, each index has three voice files
as follows.

The voice files whose signal index is 95 are for the announcements of meter counts
of calls. Its three files are FFFFF85F, FFFFF880 and FFFFF881.

FFFFF85F is the leading voice announcement and the switch plays it each time. If it
is not needed, record a one-second silence.

FFFFF880 contains the announcement of the meter count of the last call of a
subscriber. Record it like "Your last call METER count is".

FFFFF881 contains the announcement of the total meter count of a subscriber.


Record it like "Your total call METER count is".

The voice files whose signal index is 96 are for the announcements of call charges.
Its three files are FFFFF860, FFFFF882 and FFFFF883.

FFFFF860 is the leading voice announcement and the switch plays it each time. If it is
not needed, record a one-second silence.

3-107
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

FFFFF882 contains the announcement of the charge of the last call of a subscriber.
Record it like "Your last call FEE cost is".

FFFFF883 contains the announcement of the total call charge of a subscriber. Record
it like "Your total call FEE cost is".

III. Operations

To offer the Play Charge Information service for a subscriber, just carry out the MOD
NSR command and set the [SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE] parameter to "play
charging info".

After the operator adds the service authority for a subscriber and online sends the
subscriber data to the host, the switch will automatically add a record to the Play
Charge Information service dynamic table and set its value to 0. Therefore, before the
addition of the Play Charge Information service authority for a subscriber, first check
the maximum number of tuples of the Play Charge Information service dynamic table.
Otherwise, the addition of Play Charge Information service data will fail.

The cancellation of the Play Charge Information service authority of a subscriber will
cause the switch to delete the corresponding data in the Play Charge Information
service dynamic table. After the deletion, the original data cannot be recovered. If to
re-add the service authority for the subscriber, all the service data of the subscriber
will be initialized to 0. Therefore, take care when canceling the Play Charge
Information service authority of a subscriber.

IV. Related commands

z LST NSVUSER
You can carry out the LST NSVUSER command to list the total number of the Play
Charge Information service subscribers of an office and their detailed information. Set
the [SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE] parameter to "play charge info".
z DSP NSV
You can carry out the DSP NSV command to view the records in the backed-up Play
Charge Information service dynamic table on the background. Set the
[SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE] parameter to "play charge info".

V. Charge accumulation

The Play Charge Information service dynamic table accumulates only the charges of
metering bills and detailed bills. The following cases are possible.
z Calls for which the switch generates only detailed bills
In this case, the switch refreshes only the accumulated charges in the Play Charge
Information service dynamic table and will not refresh corresponding meters.

3-108
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

z Calls for which the switch only refreshes corresponding metering bills
In this case, the switch refreshes not only the accumulated charges in the Play
Charge Information service dynamic table but also corresponding meters. The
charges are calculated directly according to the tariffs of the meters.
z Calls for which the switch generates not only detailed bills but also refreshes
corresponding metering bills
In this case, the Play Charge Information service dynamic table refreshes the meter
and charge only one time and will not add the charge again to the total charge. It is
similar to the above case. Take care not to add the charge again to the Play Charge
Information service dynamic table.
z Calls for which the switch generates no bill
In this case, according to current processing mode, the switch will not refresh the Play
Charge Information service data, that is, neglect the charge of the call and have no
change of the Play Charge Information service data.

Note:
z There is no special supplementary service charging method for the Play Charge Information service.
Use a common charging method to charge it.
z The Play Charge Information service records only the charge of the charging mode that the calling or
called party is charged. For calls involving hooking, the switch considers only the charges of the
subscriber in these bills.

3.61 Play Voice

I. Meaning

This service enables the subscriber to play back the recorded voice announcement
carried by some designated timeslots.

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of the command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Operator

3-109
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

MMM Module number

NNN Timeslots to be recorded; it can be only timeslot 0, 1, 34 or 35 (when the signal


tone board is CB01) or any timeslot except timeslot 9 (when the signal tone board is
CB02, and two CB02s are configured at the same time).
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the voice announcement recorded in the
#79*MMM*NNN# timeslot corresponding to the signal tone board
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

If Subscriber A is to play back the recorded voice announcement in timeslot 34, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the voice announcement recorded in the
#79*001*034# timeslot corresponding to the signal tone board
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z This service cannot be applied on the pulse phone.

3-110
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.62 PrePaid Service

I. Meaning

PPS in ISP mode can be divided into four types: subscriber bound mode, card service
mode, card bound mode and two-stage dialing service. The latter three modes are
PPS in card mode.

Subscriber bound mode, a phone set bound service, features in binding of PPS
account and phone set. The subscriber needs to make calls on the phone set
registered with this service, and the number dialing is relatively easier than that of
PPS in card mode, without complicated tone interaction and digit collection process.
Based on the location of PPS equipment in the network, PPS of binding type can be
divided into local binding mode and centralized binding mode. Local binding means
that both PPS subscriber and PPS equipment are located at the same end office, and
the subscriber is authenticated by PPS equipment after hooking off. The number
dialing is the same as that of ordinary subscribers. Centralized binding means that
PPS equipment is located at a tandem office, and the PPS subscriber at the end
office is connected to this tandem office after hooking off and dialing the access code.
Inter-office signaling must support the transmission of calling number, based on which
the PPS equipment performs the authentication. To activate this service, an access
code must be added before the called number sent by the opposite office.

PPS in card mode enables subscribers to make calls on any DTMF phone set and
record the charge on specified account. The subscribers registered with this service
must have a unique personal card number. When activating this service, the
subscriber should input the access code, card number, password and called number
according to the prompt. Based on charging mode and use method, there are four
types of account card services: A-category subscribers (charged monthly):
Subscribers who have been installed with phone sets apply for account card service,
and if they are qualified after examined by the Telecommunication Office, they can
pay the bill by month. B-category subscribers (prepaid subscribers): When applying
for this service, subscribers must prepay a certain amount of money, which will be
deducted by each call. If the prepaid sum is used up during conversation, the system
will terminate the service, and the subscriber should repay the money for continuing
the service. If the subscriber requires to cancel the account card, the
Telecommunication Office should return the balance in the account card. C-category
subscribers (one-off subscribers): Subscribers buy account card with a certain value
and use it within the specified time limit. The fee will be deducted by each call, and if
the sum in the card is used up, the system will terminate the service. D-category
subscribers (one-off subscribers without password): Subscribers buy account card
with a certain value and use it within the specified time limit. The fee will be deducted
by each call, and if the sum in the card is used up, the system will terminate the

3-111
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

service. Subscribers of this category have no password, while A-category, B-category


and C-category subscribers have. Currently, this system supports B-category and
C-category subscribers only.

Card binding is subdivided into type-1 binding and type-3 binding. Type-1 binding
refers to one card-one phone set mode, that is, the subscriber binds one card on one
phone set. Type-3 binding refers to multiple cards-one phone set mode, that is,
multiple card subscribers (identified by subscriber number) use one phone set. A
group can have a maximum of three subscribers. For using this service, subscribers
need to make calls on the phone set registered with this service, and they can
register by themselves the card numbers to be bound on phone set. Currently, the
system supports the binding of B-category and C-category card.

For authentication subscribers, two-stage dialing service mainly functions in


authenticating subscriber identity and secondary digit collection upon hearing the
secondary dialing tone. Budget and call monitoring are not provided for this type of
subscribers.

II. Setting conditions

z Configuration of ISP
Configuration of ISP includes two aspects: physical data configuration and function
item configuration.
1) Physical data configuration
[Command]: ADD BRD

[Example]:

Add an ISP:

ADD BRD: MN=0, F=1, S=7, BT=ISP;

BT stands for board type.


2) Function item configuration
[Command]: ADD ISPFUNC

[Example]:

Configure a certain ISP to store PPS data:

ADD ISPFUNC: FCF=BILL, BG=1;

FCF stands for ISP function item type.


z Configuration of tone-playing & digit-collection resource
1) Configuration of centralized digit collection frame in SM
[Command]: ADD BDIN

3-112
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

[Example]:

ADD BDIN: MN=90, F=4, LN=0, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=0, N1=12, N2=13, N3=14,
N4=15, HW1=4, HW2=6, HW3=8, HW4=10, BV=CQ02;

Note:
Command ADD BDIN is used to configure the Decode Interface (DIN) frame. Command parameter "BV"
stands for the version of the Special Tone Board (SPT), and CQ02 should be selected. NOD and HW in
the parameter need to keep consistency with the actual physical connections.

2) Configuration of SRM frame in AM


[Command]: ADD SRMFRM

[Example]:

ADD SRMFRM: FN=18, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=0;


3) CDB function item configuration
[Command]: ADD CDBFUNC

[Example]:

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=SPD, BG=0;

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=DTR, BG=0;

Note:
Because SPM resource is managed by the AM, Central Database (CDB) must be configured. A group of
CDPs can be configured with multiple functions, however, each function can only be configured to one
group of CDPs. Repetitive addition is not allowed. The ISP card service requires the configuration of the
SPD and DTR management function for the CDB.

4) Physical data configuration for SPD/SPT/SRC/DIN


[Command]: ADD BRD

[Example]:

ADD BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=4, BT=SPD;


5) Function item configuration for SPD
[Command]: ADD SPDCFG

3-113
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

[Example]:

ADD SPDCFG: FN=18, BN=4, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=0;


6) Function item configuration for SRC
[Command]: ADD SRCCFG

[Example]:

ADD SRCCFG: FN=18, BN=6, DSP1=DTR, DSP2=DTR, DSP3=FSK, DSP4=COF,


LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=16;

In the above example, two DSPs on the Shared Resource Board (SRC) are
configured as Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board (DTR)s, and another two Digital
Signal Process (DSP)s provide Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) and conference call
resource respectively.
z Configuration of resource data
Resource data configuration here means the configuration of the data for
management of IN module on resource used in the card service, including resource
capability, resource searching, language index data and currency index.
1) Resource capability configuration
[Command]: ADD SSPSRC

[Example]:

ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=200, MN=255;

SSP dedicated resource capability indicates which modules are provided with the
resource capability for a specific service. In the command, module number ranges
from 0 to 255. 255 indicates that all the modules are provided with the resource
capability for this service. The setting in the above example shows that all local
modules have the resource capability for 200 card service.
2) Resource searching data
[Command]: ADD SRCSRH

[Example]:

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=90, SRC=BRD, STATE=USE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=91, MDU2=92,


MDU3=93, MDU4=94;

If a local module has no available resource, it can request other modules for the
resource after configured with this data.

It is recommended to adopt the fixed searching mode. Refer to the following table for
the sequence of the modules to be searched.

3-114
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Table 3-2 Example of resource searching data

No. 1 Searched No. 2 Searched No. 3 Searched No. 4 Searched


Module number
Module Module Module Module
1 2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5 1
3 4 5 1 2
4 5 1 2 3
5 1 2 3 4

Note:
In addition to traffic statistics and routine message transmission and reception between modules, lots of
messages will also be transmitted between modules in case of using resource of multiple modules,
therefore, the traffic rate among SMs should be 512 kbit/s to avoid communication failure, and there will
be no problem when the traffic rate among SPMs is 2 Mbit/s

3) Language index data


Language index must be configured as 10, indicating the language index used by the
first voice announcement issued. Generally it is necessary to configure the data for
default language index, which should be set in command SET PPSCFG.

[Command]: ADD INLNG

[Example]:

ADD INLNG: LI=10, LT1=64, LT2=20;

ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;

Example 1 indicates to first play the English version (0X40) of the voice
announcement issued as language index 10, and then the Spanish version (0x14).
Example 2 indicates only to play the English version of the voice announcement
issued as language index 1. Please refer to the following Note for the voice
announcement corresponding relations.
4) Currency index data
[Command]: ADD CURIDX

[Example]:

ADD CURIDX: LNG=64, CUR=1, UNT1="00000135", UNTS1="00000136",


UNT3="00000137", UNTS3="00000138";

3-115
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

The data for playing currency index 1 in English (0x40) is added in the above
example. Singular main currency is played by basic voice announcement 00000135,
and the main currency in plural form is played by basic voice announcement
00000136. Fractional currency 1 is not played. Fractional currency 2 in single form is
played by 00000137, and that in plural form is played by 00000138.

Note:
Card service in ISP mode does not support multiple currencies, and the currency index issued in the
service is fixed to 1.

z Configuration of service data


Switch data configuration for PPS monthly rental subscribers:
1) Call source data
Specify a dedicated call source for the monthly rental subscribers and configure the
number preparation data. The access code for monthly rental service will be inserted
before the called number when the caller hooks off and dials a number. For example,

ADD CALLSRC: CSC=10, DCF=YES, DCX=10;

The number change index corresponds to number insertion processing: insert the
monthly rental service access code 201 before the called number.
2) Prefix data
PPS is triggered through access code, therefore, it is necessary to configure the
corresponding prefix data. For monthly rental service, the service type should be set
as basic service, and the service attribute should be set as PPS. For example,

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'201, CSTP=BASE, CSA=PPSSVR, MINL=3, MAXL=24,


CHSC=10;

The monthly rental service is trigger by access code plus called number, therefore,
the data for prefix processing (number deletion and reanalysis) should be configured:

ADD PFXPRO: PFX=K'201, CSC=10, DDC=YES, DDCX=20, RAF=YES;

Number change index 20 corresponds to number deletion, and reanalysis will be


carried out after prefix 201 is deleted.
3) Billing control data
Besides the data configuration for normal switch (note that PPS does not support
premium currently due to limited budget), the billing data for controlling conversation
duration (the minimum and maximum conversation duration for PPS subscribers) can
be set upon subscribers' demand.

3-116
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

For example,

ADD TCTRL: CGR=10, CHSC=20, TIME=60, FLAG=YES, ALMT=60;

The data indicates that the maximum conversation duration for a PPS subscriber to
call a certain prefix is 10 hours. If the duration exceeds 10 hours, the call will be
disconnected, but an alarm will be given 1 minute before the disconnection. In
addition, the alarm for reporting the duration can control the minimum balance for
PPS calls, and the balance should be enough for the alarm call; otherwise, the alarm
call will not be provided.
4) Caller discrimination data
Because the calling number is used as a key field for query, calling numbers must be
provided for the binding PPS calls, and the calling authentication data should be
configured if a subscriber is accessed from other offices. For example,

ADD CLRDSG: DSP=10, CLI=K'0755654, DAI=NDN, FUNC=ATT, CHG=10;

The data indicates that the discrimination group is 10, the prefix of the calling number
is 0755654, the address attribute is calling attribute conversion for a domestic call,
and the billing source of the caller is modified to 10. The data is useful when a trunk
can access subscribers of different areas. At this time, the billing source of the callers
will not use the billing source codes on the trunk group, and the callers can be located
precisely.

ADD N7TG: TG=10, G=IN, SRC=10, NIF=YES, NICF=NO, ISCLR=TRUE;

ADD TGDSG: TG=10, CCAT=254, DSG=10;

Then, set the trunk group data for the quotation of the corresponding discrimination
group data, and process the calling number request.
5) ISP data configuration
Besides the hardware data of ISP, the function items of ISP should also be configured
on the switch, so as to let the host know which board should be queried for a data.

ADD ISPFUNC: FCF=BILL, BG=1;

In the above data, ISP group 1 is configured to store PPS data.


z Switch data configuration for PPS in card mode
For PPS in card mode, the system adds a module to simulate SCP for the control,
and other processing employs the IN flow. Therefore, apart form the basic data
configuration, the card service also requires the configuration of part of IN data.
1) Prefix data
The card service is triggered by access code, the corresponding prefix data should be
configured as follows: service type to IN service, and service attribute to PPS.

3-117
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'200, CSTP=IN, CSA=PPSSVR, MINL=3, MAXL=3,


CHSC=65535;
2) Billing control data
The same data configuration as the above PPS by month.
3) Caller discrimination data
If the subscribers of other offices can make card calls, the caller discrimination data
should be configured.
4) Card service configuration table data
In view of flexibility, some parameters in the card service can be set. For example,

SET PPSCFG: SKEY=PPSKEY, MAXC=12, MINC=6, MAXP=6, MINP=4, LANG1=K'0,


LANG2=K'1, DEFLI=1, QUYB=K'11, MODP=K'22, TANB=K'33, SETC=K'44,
CANC=K'55, PROB=YES, PROA=YES, CHOP=YES;

The maximum & minimum length for a card number is set to 12 and 6 respectively;
the maximum & minimum length for a password is set to 6 and 4 respectively;
language selection code 1 is set to 0, and language selection code 2 is set to 1; the
default language index is set to 0; the password query and modification selection
code is set to 11 and 22 respectively; the balance transfer selection code is set to 33;
card number bound selection code is set to 44, and the selection code for canceling
card number bound is set to 55; The balance will be prompted before/after the
conversation and language selection is provided. When configuring data for multiple
languages, note that the language selection code N corresponds to the language
index N.
5) IN DP data
ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CODE=K'200, SKEY=200, RNFLG=REQ;

ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'200, LEN=3;

Configure the IN access code corresponding to prefix 200 and trigger DP data to
activate IN flow.
6) IN multi-language supporting data
ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;

The above data indicates the language code corresponding to language index 1 is 64
(play in English).
7) Software parameter
The system cannot support the card service in ISP mode and IN service at the same
time, therefore, a software parameter is added for distinguish these two services:

MOD SFP: ID=P127, VAL="0xefff";

The above data indicates to support the card service in ISP mode.

3-118
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

8) Billing data
In case of configuring the PPS billing data, note to specify a separate billing source
for PPS subscribers to facilitate separate billing. Currently, PPS is changed when the
callee answers the call, therefore, the data at the billing point has no impact on PPS.
In addition, note that the current PPS system does not support premium, which will
not calculated even if the actual calculation is set.
z PPS data
The PPS system data comprises switch configuration data, service data, PPS control
data and PPS data. The first several kinds of data are set to the foreground SPC or
Main Processor Unit (MPU) database via Back Administration Module (BAM), and the
latter one is directly set to the database in ISP via service server. The service server
communicates with ISP via Ethernet, and its Internet Protocol (IP) address is fixed to
172.20.200.199. The ISP already configured with PPS should also set on the service
server to inform it of the communication party.

The PPS data configured by the service server is as follows:


1) Setting the location of ISP
The ISP location of the PPS function item should be set on the service server to
facilitate the correct communication between them.

[Command]: SET ISP

[Example]:

SET ISP: MF=1, MS=9, SF=1, SS=10;

The active ISP is set to slot 9 of frame 1, and the standby ISP is set to slot 10 of
frame 1.
2) Card distribution command
This command is for setting PPS account and balance. Because it is hard to carry out
fast random query of a card number in the database of the switch in the condition that
the capacity is used as little as possible, the system distributes card numbers based
on subscriber data. In order to implement disperse distribution of cards for the
subscribers bound, the system carries out the special processing of activation and
deactivation. Card distribution involves commands such as card number segment
distribution, card number activation.

a) Card number segment distribution in card mode

PPS in card mode is different from PPS by month in card mode: using different
commands. The random distribution of cards in the data of PPS in card mode is
actually to set an activation rate within a number segment, and the system will
generate the corresponding quantity of card numbers within the number segment
based on this activation rate.

3-119
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

[Command]:DST CARD

[Example]:

DST CARD: TP=RC, SC=K'7553211000, EC=K'7553211100, SY=2002, SM=AUG,


SD=1, VP=24, PB=100, RL=500, EF="pps.crd", MB=3, EY=2004, EM=AUG, ED=1,
PL=4;

B-category card number segment setting: the starting number is 7553211000; the
ending number is 7553211100; the preset amount is 100; the upper limit for money
recharge is 500; the card number distribution date is Aug. 1, 2002; the valid period of
card number segment is 24 months; the expiry date of the card number is Aug. 1,
2004; the password is 4 bits (6 bits by default), and is generated randomly. A file
"pps.crd" for storing card number data is generated when a card number is distributed.
The path for storing card number data can be specified in 128BAM.INI in the service
server, and the default card number file is named as "current date _sequence
number.crd", for example, the card number file firstly distributed on July 22, 2002 is
named as "20020722_1.crd".

b) Distribution card number segment for monthly rental subscribers

[Command]: SET MTHST

[Example]:

SET MTHST: SC=K'6540000, EC=K'6540999, PB=50, RL=2000, AR=NO;

Monthly rental subscriber segment setting: the starting card number is 6540000; the
ending card number is 6540999; the preset sum is 50 yuan; the upper limit for money
recharge is 2000 yuan; the card numbers within the card number segment are not
activated (note that when PPS subscribers and ordinary subscribers within the
number segment are mixed together, the following command RES CARD will be
used).

Note: The accounts of monthly rental subscribers are based on their actual phone
numbers, therefore, account and number should be corresponded during data
configuration.

c) Activation and deactivation of monthly rental subscribers

[Command]: RES CARD

[Example]:

RES CARD: SN=K'6540000, EN=K'6540011, RT=STA, CS=ACT;

Activate the card numbers from 6540000 to 6540011.

RES CARD: SN=K'6540000, EN=K'6540011, RT=STA, CS=DEA;

3-120
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Deactivate the card numbers from 6540000 to 6540011.

d) Modification of caller attributes

[Command]: MOD CLRATTR

[Example]:

MOD CLRATTR: SN=K'7540000, EN=K'7540011, CBG=2, CHSC=10, RTSC=10;

Modify the call barring group number for 7540000 - 7540011 to 2, the billing source
code to 10, and routing code to 10.

e) Import of card number data file

[Command]: IMP CARD

[Example]:

IMP CARD: IF="d:\card\20020117. crd";

Card number generation by card manufacturer is also supported for card distribution:
the manufacturer provides the card number file to the carrier, then the carrier can
import the PPS data stored in file format into the system using this command.

Currently, the system only supports to import the card number files of rechargeable
cards and sum-limited cards.

The format for card number file is:

####CardSegment

6680000 6680010 2 500 500 020701 6 3

####CardNumber

6680000 248210 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680001 958521 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680002 208872 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680003 916043 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680004 426694 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680005 937545 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680006 000406 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680007 939527 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680008 967168 500 021201 65535 255 65535

6680009 588399 500 021201 65535 255 65535

3-121
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

6680010 106740 500 021201 65535 255 65535

####End

CardSegment format is:

starting card number ending card number card type preset sum
limited sum for recharge distribution date valid period of card number
segment times of black card

card type value =1, rechargeable card; card type value =2, sum-limited card;

CardNumber format is:

card number password sum expiry date of card number call barring group
number routing source code

In case of card number file generated by card manufacturer, the manufacturer need
not consider the call barring group number, billing source code and routing source
code, which are filled as 65535, 255, 65535 respectively. After the carrier imports the
card number file, he/she can modify these three codes by command MOD CLRATTR.
Each field of these two parts must be input according to the format; otherwise, the
information "file format error" will be reported.

Other commands, such as CHK CARD, RCH CARD, DSP CARD, LST CARD, will not
be described here.

f) Timing task

In the next version, there are four timing tasks by default:

BKP CARD: executed at 1:30 a.m.

BKP SERV: executed at 2:30 a.m.

FMT: executed at 3:30 a.m.

STR CRC executed at 4:30 a.m.

Due to the frequent sum change of PPS subscribers, it will make a big impact on the
service server if the updated sum is continuously written back into the database by
real-time backup of card number data. Therefore, timing backup (incremental backup)
of card number data is adopted now.

After the card number data and database are backed up, the newest data is only
written into the database, but not formatted into a data file in which the data is still not
updated. In order to prevent reloading ISP data file after the switch reset, the
database must be formatted periodically. The system will format the database at 3:30
a.m. by default.

3-122
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

The interval for executing BKP CARD and FMT within one day should be as short as
possible. In heavy-traffic hours, do not execute BKP CARD as possible. Before
executing FMT, BKP CARD should executed first to ensure the newest card number
data.

Note:
z Monthly rental subscribers, card number bound subscribers and authentication subscribers are all
subscriber-related services, and the operations should be carried out on the phone set registered
with the corresponding service.
z Budget and call monitoring are not provided for authentication subscribers (two-stage dialing
subscribers).
z A subscriber can bind the card number or cancel it through a phone set, and cancel the card number
bound service through the service server command.
z The following software parameter controls whether an authentication subscriber sends an answer
signal before the callee answers the call: OVS_CCB_PARA3
BIT7: corresponding to software parameter IPSECON_SEND_ALERT (OVS_CCB_PARA3_BIT7) used
to determine whether CONNECT or ALERTING messages is returned to the office where the caller is
located in case of false connections in the IN authentication service.
1: return ALERTING message (by default)
0: return CONNECT message

3.63 Prompt of Incoming Call

I. Meaning

This service is to prompt the subscriber in conversation that there is a national or


international toll call in waiting.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "prompt of incoming call" authority (you can use the command
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A, B and C are ordinary subscribers. Subscriber A has the "prompt of incoming call"
authority. Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber C.
1) Service operation

3-123
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A Subscribers B & A hear the prompt tone
Subscriber A has the call waiting Refer to "call waiting" service for specific operation
operation authority process

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

A Service subscriber with the "prompt of incoming call" authority, whose number
is 8883080

B Ordianry subscriber, whose number is 8883010

C Ordianry subscriber, whose number is 8883020

Suppose Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber C, the operation process is as


follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials 8883080 SubscribersB & A hear the prompt tone
Subscriber A presses the Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and Subscriber C hears the
hook and then dials "1" busy tone
Subscriber A presses the Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and Subscriber C hears the
hook and then dials "2" music and holds on
Subscriber A does not act, Subscriber B hears the busy tone, and Subscriber A continues to talk
90 seconds later with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-124
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z If a subscriber is registered with call waiting service as well as incoming call prompt service, or the
caller is registered with outgoing call prompt service, the incoming call prompt for the callee will not
function. Nevertheless, the prompt tone of the subscriber is decided jointly by bit 9 of the CCB
internal parameter 3 and bit 9 &10 of the F150 service parameter.
z Bit 9 of the CCB internal parameter 3 controls whether incoming call prompt functions or not (1 for
function; 0 for not function). Bit 10 of the F150 service parameter controls whether only toll calls are
prompted (1 for prompting national/international toll calls; 0 for prompting all incoming calls).
z Bit 9 of the F150 service parameter controls the prompt tone of incoming toll calls (1 for incoming toll
call tone; 0 for ordinary call waiting tone).

3.64 Prompt of Outgoing Call

I. Meaning

This service is also called "caller controlled call waiting" service. When a subscriber
registered with this service makes a call, the callee will hear a voice prompt for the
incoming call during the conversation with another subscriber even if the callee has
no authority for call waiting service.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "prompt of outgoing call" authority (you can use the command
ADD ST or MOD ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A, B and C are ordinary subscribers. Subscriber A has the "prompt of outgoing call"
authority. Subscriber B is talking with Subscriber C.
1) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber A calls Subscriber B
Subscriber B hears the call waiting prompt tone
Subscriber B has the call waiting operation Refer to Call Waiting service for specific operation
authority process

3-125
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

A Service subscriber, whose number is 8883080, with the "prompt of outgoing


call" authority

B Callee, whose number is 8883010

C Ordinary subscriber

Suppose Subscriber B is talking with Subscriber C, the operation process is as


follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscribe B
Subscriber A dials 8883010
hears the call waiting prompt tone
Subscriber B presses the hook and then Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and Subscriber C
dials "1" hears the busy tone
Subscriber B presses the hook and then Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and Subscriber C
dials "2" hears the music
Subscriber B takes no action, 90 seconds Subscriber A hears the busy tone, and Subscriber B
later continues to talk with Subscriber C

2) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z This service is used only within the local office, and it cannot prompt the higher-priority talks, such as
toll talks or operator-involved talks.
z If a subscriber registered with this service calls another subscriber who is in conversation and has
registered call waiting service, priority is given to call waiting service.

3-126
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.65 Quick Access

I. Meaning

A short number (such as *14, *15, *16) can be set to stand for a long number. They
are unique numbers in an office.

II. Setting conditions

This service needs no registration or authority requirement. It can be used if only the
data are configured at the local office. Data configuration method is as follows:
z Set a short number (such as *14) as the new service prefix of "Quick Access " by
command ADD CNACLD.
z Add a number change index by command ADD DNC. The number change type
is "NUMBER CHANGED", and set the corresponding long number for the short
number.
z Set special processing of number initial for the short number (*14) by command
ADD PFXPRO, and convert the called number (the change index is the one set
at step 2), and then set "TRUE" for the reanalysis option.

Note:
For Centrex subscribers, outgoing prefix should be added before the long number during data
configuration.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

SN Short number

DN Long number corresponding to the short number, that is, the number of
Subscriber B
1) Service registration
Null.
2) Service operation

3-127
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears the ring
Subscriber A dials SN
back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscribers A and B talk with each other
Subscriber B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Null.

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A is the service subscriber, and the short number *14
corresponds to the number of Subscriber B.
1) Service registration
Null.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone, and Subscriber A hears the ring
Subscriber A dials *14
back tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscribers A and B talk with each other
Subscriber B hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Null.

3.66 Registered Call

I. Meaning

When the callee is busy, your call is registered. When you make this call next time,
just lift the handset for more than 5 seconds, and the telephone will automatically dial
the callee’s number.

3-128
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "registered call" authority (you can use the command ADD ST
or MOD ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B Callee
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the telephone number of
Subscriber A hears the busy tone
Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *53# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
153 (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
5 seconds later
Subscriber B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and the
Subscriber B hooks off
registration is then automatically cancelled
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
If Subscriber A wants to cancel this service within 20 minutes of registration, then:

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #53# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
151153 (on Pulse phone) the successful service cancellation

Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-129
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Registered call will be cancelled automatically after 20 minutes from registration.

IV. Example

If Subscriber B’s number is 8883850 and he/she is busy, the operation process is as
follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials 8883850 Subscriber A hears the busy tone
Subscriber A presses the hook Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *53# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
153 (on Pulse phone) the successful service registration
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears the
5 seconds later
ringing tone
Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B, and the registration is then
Subscriber B hooks off
automatically cancelled
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
If Subscriber A wants to cancel the service within 20 minutes of registration, then:

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #53# (on DTMF phone) or Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
151153 (on Pulse phone) the successful service cancellation
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-130
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services.
z This service is valid within twenty minutes after the registration.
z If the subscriber originates another call within twenty minutes, the registration will be cancelled
automatically.

3.67 Remote Active CFB

I. Meaning

The CFB can be set remotely so that all the calls to a subscriber will be forwarded to
another designated number when the subscriber is busy.

This service is only for Centrex subscribers.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CFB" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it). The service has been registered in command ADD CNACLD, and the
service attribute is "CFB".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Callee with the password of SSSS

B Remote service subscriber to whom the calls will be forwarded when


Subscriber A is busy

C, D Callers
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials *401*SSSS*A’s Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
number* transferred number# successful registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation

3-131
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A
Subscriber C dials A’s number
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber D hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B
Subscriber D dials A’s number
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber D

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
#401*SSSS*A’s number# successful cancellation of the service

Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A’s password (SSSS) is 1234, telephone number is 3850, and
Subscriber B's number is 3851, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
*401*1234*3850*3851# registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the
Subscriber C dials 3850
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber D hooks off Subscriber D hears the dialing tone
Subscriber D hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber D dials 3850
ringing tone

3-132
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber D

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
#401*1234*3850# cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and remote activation of
the CFB service.
z When remote activation of the CFB service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the
do-not-disturb service takes precedence.
z When remote activation of the CFB service is applied for, the subscriber will not have the call waiting
function.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and remote activation of the CFB
service.
z The remote activation of the CFU service takes precedence over the remote activation of the CFB
service.

3.68 Remote Active CFNR

I. Meaning

The CFNR can be set remotely so that all the calls to a subscriber will be forwarded
to the designated number when no one answers the calls within a specified time
period.

This service is only for Centrex subscribers.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CFNR" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it). The service has been registered in the command ADD CNACLD,
and the service attribute is "CFNR".

3-133
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Callee

B Remote service subscriber to whom the calls will be forwarded

C Caller
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials *411*SSSS*A’s Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
number*transferred numbe# successful registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears
Subscriber C dials A’s number
the ringing tone

Subscriber A does not answer the Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
call within the specified time the ringing tone

Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C


Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
#411*SSSS*A’s number # successful cancellation of the service

Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A’s password is 1234, telephone number is 3850, and Subscriber
B's number is 3851, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration

3-134
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*411*1234*3850*3851# successful registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears
Subscriber C dials 3850
the ringing tone
Subscriber A does not answer the Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
call within the specified time the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
#411*1234*3850# successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and remote activation of
the CFNR service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy and remote activation of the CFNR
service.
z When remote activation of the CFNR service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the
do-not-disturb service takes precedence.
z When remote activation of the CFNR service is applied for, the subscriber will not have the call
waiting function.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and remote activation of the CFNR
service.
z Remote activation of the CFU service takes precedence over remote activation of the CFNR service.

3-135
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.69 Remote Active CFU

I. Meaning

The CFU can be set remotely so that all the calls to a subscriber will be forwarded to
another number unconditionally.

This service is only for Centrex subscribers.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "CFU" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it). The service has been registered in command ADD CNACLD, and the
service attribute is "CFU.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Callee with the password of SSSS

B Remote service subscriber to whom the calls will be forwarded

C Caller
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
*571*SSSS*A’s
registration of the service
number*transferred number#
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber C dials A’s number
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation

3-136
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
#571*SSSS*A’s number# cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A’s number is 3850, Subscriber B's number is 3851, and
Subscriber A’s password (SSSS) is 1234, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
*571*1234*3850*3851# registration of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B
Subscriber C dials 3850
hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers B and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
Subscriber B dials #571*1234*3850#
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber B hangs up Service cancelled

3-137
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service and remote activation of
the CFU service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for call back on busy service and remote activation of
the CFU service.
z When call forwarding service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the do-not-disturb service
takes precedence.
z When the remote activation of the CFU service is applied for, the subscriber can not use the call
waiting function.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for wake up service and remote activation of the CFU
service.
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.70 Secretary

I. Meaning

Designate a phone set as the secretary phone to receive all the calls to the manager.
Only the secretary can directly call the manager, and the calls from others to the
manager will go to secretary first.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "secretary service" authority (you can use the command ADD
ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the "supplementary
service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber using a DTMF phone

C Caller

TN Telephone number of secretary B


1) Service registration

3-138
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
Subscriber A dials *77* TN#
successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials Subscriber Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
A’s number ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber B presses the Subscriber B hears special dialing tone and Subscriber C hears the
hook music
Subscriber B dials Subscriber Subscriber B hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the
A’s number ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber B hangs up Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
Subscriber A dials #77#
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A's number is 8883851 and Subscriber B's number is 8883850,
the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration

3-139
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
*77*8883850# successful registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber C dials 8883851
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber B hears the special dialing tone and Subscriber C
Subscriber B presses the hook
hears the music
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the
Subscriber B dials 8883851
ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber B hangs up Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating
Subscriber A dials #77#
successful cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

3-140
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z In this example, Subscriber A is the manager and Subscriber B is the secretary.
z Priority is given to the secretary service if the call forwarding unconditional is also registered.
z By default, priority is given to the secretary service other than the do-not-disturb, call forwarding busy
and call waiting services. Service priority setting can be viewed and modified by use of commands
LST PRI and MOD PRI.
z This service is not applicable to pulse phone.
z Bit 6 of the CCB internal parameter 4 decides whether the calls from the Centrex group are directly
connected to the manager or transferred by the secretary. If bit 6 is 1 (default value), all calls go to
the secretary first. If bit 6 is 0, calls from the Centrex group directly go to the manager.

3.71 Secretary Station

I. Meaning

The secretary station has the call queuing function as well as secretary function.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "secretary station service" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber using a DTMF phone

B, C Callers
1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
*78# registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation

3-141
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B dials Subscriber B hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears the ringing
Subscriber A’s number tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials
Subscriber C hears the ring back tone
Subscriber A’s number
Subscribers A and B
Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
hang up
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C
Service ended
hang up

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
#78# cancellation of the service

Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

If Subscriber A’s number is 8883850, the operation process is as follows:


1) Service registration
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
Subscriber A dials *78#
registration of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation

3-142
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber B hears the dialing tone
Subscriber B hears the ring back tone and Subscriber A hears
Subscriber B dials 8883850
the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber C hears the dialing tone
Subscriber C dials 8883850 Subscriber C hears the ring back tone
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscribers A and C hang up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone indicating successful
Subscriber A dials #78#
cancellation of the service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other the supplementary services.
z By default, priority is given to the call forwarding unconditional, do-not-disturb, call forwarding busy
and call waiting services other than the secretary station service. Service priority setting can be
viewed and modified by use of commands LST PRI and MOD PRI.
z This service is not applicable to pulse phone.

3.72 Special Number Prompt Tone

I. Meaning

1) Special Number Prompt Tone Service


For subscribers who have activated the special number prompt tone (SNPT) service,
after they finish dialing a special number, the switch will send an announcement to
inform them what the number dialed is for. In this way, wrong calls to important
numbers are avoided. For example, after a subscriber makes a fire emergency call,

3-143
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

the switch will first send an announcement like "You are calling the firefighters" before
connecting the call.

The SNPT service is available on both the switching module (SM) and service
processing module (SPM). For the SM, it is the special voice board (SPT) (or the
special tone board (SPD) of the SPM) that sends voice announcements. For the SPM,
it is the SPD that sends voice announcements. Both cases are processed by the
voice announcement flow of the PPS service. Since switches carries on connections
only after announcement is over, communication connection will delay.

Here are some notes on using the SNPT service:


z Local subscribers do not need to apply for service usage, but they need to apply
for service cancellation. For incoming calls, you have to apply for both usage and
cancellation.
z Subscriber categories supported: All categories of local subscribers are
supported.
z The SNPT service supports such caller categories as ordinary subscriber, priority
subscriber, operator subscriber, data subscriber, test subscriber, and payphone
subscriber. The switch uses software parameters to control the caller categories
for which it sends the SNPT. On receipt of a caller category which is not listed
above through trunks, the switch will not send the SNPT. However, if the caller
category is "UNKNOWN", the switch will send the SNPT in the case of the
incoming trunk of channel associated signaling (CAS).
z The SNPT service supports intra-office calls, outgoing calls, incoming calls, and
transit calls. However, it supports only basic service calls. Trunks do not support
the prompt tone for sending special numbers by default. If the switch need send
an announcement through a trunk group, it is necessary to set the trunk group to
support the SNPT service.
z The SNPT service supports such signaling systems as integrated services digital
network subscriber part (ISUP), telephone subscriber part (TUP), CAS, and
primary rate adaptation (PRA).
z The SNPT service is available only on non-SSP offices.
z Currently, the switch does not charge the SNPT service.
2) Peru Feature
For the Peru feature of the SNPT service, the C&C08 switch determines to send
tones to which prefix through special processing of prefixes. A software parameter is
added to determine which number analysis result is to be used because multiple
special processings of prefixes involve several prefix re-analysis results. This feature
achieves different tones to be sent to different carriers. By default, the switch uses the
Peru mode to send tones.
z Peru mode: The switch decides whether to send the voice announcement and
which voice announcement to be sent according to the analysis result of the first
prefix that needs provision of voice announcements.

3-144
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

z Non-Peru mode: The switch decides whether to send voice announcements


according to the last analyzed prefix.

II. Setting conditions

z Ordinary SNPT Service


The data configuration process for the ordinary SNPT service is as follows:
1) Set an access code for tone sending (SET PPSCFG).
2) Add an intelligent network (IN) prefix (ADD CNACLD).
3) Add an IN detection point (DP) data (ADD TDPCFG).
4) Configure resource capability (ADD SSPSRC).
5) Configure resource search data (ADD SRCSRH).
When a module has no resource, it can apply to other modules in the office for
resources after the configuration of the resource search data. It is recommended to
set the search mode to "Fixed search". For recommended search sequence for the
modules in an office, refer to Table 1.

Table 3-3 Table 1 Recommended search sequence for modules in an office

The 1st search The 2nd search The 3rd search The 4th search
Module No.
module module module module
1 2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5 1
3 4 5 1 2
4 5 1 2 3
5 1 2 3 4

Note:
If a module uses the resources of other modules, to avoid communication failure between modules due
to low communication rate, set the inter-module communication rate of the main processng unit (MPU) in
the SM to 512 kbit/s. There is no such problem in the SPM.

6) Add a language index (ADD INLNG).


7) Add a special prefix for specified prefixes (ADD PFXPRO).
8) Modify software parameters (MOD SFP).
The SNPT service uses the PPS procedures to send voice announcements, instead
of the IN procedures, so the switch uses a software parameter to distinguish them.
9) Set the voice announcement sending authority for a trunk group (MOD N7TG).
z Peru Feature

3-145
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

The C&C08 switch is added a software parameter to control whether to use the Peru
voice announcement sending mode.

MOD SFP: ID=P92, VAL="ffbf"; use the non-Peru mode

III. Operation

z Correspondence between SNPT Types and Voice Files


There are totally 20 SNPT types. The voice codes range from 500 to 519. These 20
SNPT types correspond to 20 voice files and are defined especially for the SNPT
service. You need to load them to the SPDs/SPTs.

The name of the voice file is as "06LLXXXX.001", where "06" stands for the PPS, "LL"
stands for the language ("40" represents English). "XXXX" stands for the voice code
and ranges from 01F4 to 0207 (hexadecimal, corresponding to the voice codes
500-519). Table 2 gives the correspondence between SNPT types and voice files.
The voice contents are determined based on prefix. Record the voices as needed.

Table 3-4 correspondence between SNPT types and voice files

SNPT types Corresponding voice files


PROMPT TONE 0 " 064001F4.001"
PROMPT TONE 1 " 064001F5.001"
PROMPT TONE 2 " 064001F6.001"
PROMPT TONE 3 " 064001F7.001"
PROMPT TONE 4 " 064001F8.001"
PROMPT TONE 5 " 064001F9.001"
PROMPT TONE 6 " 064001Fa.001"
PROMPT TONE 7 " 064001Fb.001"
PROMPT TONE 8 " 064001Fc.001"
PROMPT TONE 9 " 064001Fd.001"
PROMPT TONE 10 " 064001Fe.001"
PROMPT TONE 11 " 064001Ff.001"
PROMPT TONE 12 " 06400200.001"
PROMPT TONE 13 " 06400201.001"
PROMPT TONE 14 " 06400202.001"
PROMPT TONE 15 " 06400203.001"
PROMPT TONE 16 " 06400204.001"
PROMPT TONE 17 " 06400205.001"

3-146
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

SNPT types Corresponding voice files


PROMPT TONE 18 " 06400206.001"
PROMPT TONE 19 " 06400207.001"

z Voice Files Loaded to SPD/SPT


The steps for loading voice files are as follows:
1) Copy voice files to be loaded into the corresponding directory. The default
directory is "D:\DATA\VOICE".
2) Load the SPD/SPT voice files with the command LAD SPDVOICE.
3) Query whether voice files are loaded successfully with the command DSP
SPDVOICE/DSP SPTVOICE.
Commands related to SPD/SPT voice file load operations are displayed in Table 3.

Table 3-5 Command list

Command name Command function


LAD SPDVOICE Load the SPD/SPT voice
LST VCEFILE Display SPD/SPT voice files
DEL SPDVOICE Delete the SPD/SPT voice
DSP SPDVOICE Query SPD voice codes
DSP SPTVOICE Query SPT voice codes
DSP SPDCOUNT Query the numbers of SPD voice codes
SET SPDVER Set SPD/SPT voice versions

Note:
z When a single file is loaded, you have to enter its filename (without a directory) and the file must
exist in the lower-level directory (directory name is voice) of the loading directory.
z When files are loaded in batch, you only need to enter their directory name (without a directory). The
directory name must exist in the subdirectory VOICE of the loading directory and these files must
exist in the VOICE directory.

IV. Example

z Shared-Voice Data Configuration


The SM of the C&C08 switch usually uses its own voice resources. The SPM uses
the voice resources provided by the SPD. You can make voice resources shared

3-147
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

between SMs and between SM and SPM through data configuration. Here is the
configuration steps.
1) Set static signal tone (SET SIGCFG).
2) Add timeslot configuration for signal tone (ADD SIGSLOT).
Examples for SM shared voice

Regard recorded announcement 0 for SM 31 as a dialing tone for SPM and SM 32.
1) Set recorded announcement 0 of SM 31 to tone source for sending tone.
SET SIGCFG: TT=ST0, SRC=SM, MN=31;
2) Import recorded announcement 0 of SM 31 into SPM and SM 32.
ADD SIGSLOT: MN=31, ST=ST0, SPM=TNCC, HW=48, SN=0;

ADD SIGSLOT: MN=31, ST=ST0, SPM=NO, HW=48, SN=0, DMN=32;

Parameter description

Module, HW number, and TS: They are the parameters of the module for exporting
voices. One SM has 64 signal tones. The first 32 signal tones use the 32 time slots
(TS) in highway 48 on the network board in numerical sequence. The last 32 signal
tones use 32 time slots in highway 71 on the network board.

Relation with SPM: When an SM sends signal tones to an SPM, select "send tone to
the NCC". When an SM sends signal tones to an SM, select "no relations". When an
SPM sends signal tones to an SM, select "collect tone from the NCC".

If "Relation with SPM" is set to "send tone to the NCC", the parameter "Signal Tone
Type" refers to SPM static signal tone (destination signal tone) rather than the signal
tone of signal tone source.

Set the parameters "Imported Module" and "Source Module" according to actual
situations. If the preset module number tone source is the actual tone source, enter
"255" directly. If voice is exported hierarchically (90->31->SPM), set "Imported
Module" to module 32 and "Source Module" to module 90.

Examples for SPM shared voice

Suppose that the dialing tone of SPM uses that of SM 31.


1) Set SPM dialing tone to tone source of sending tone.
SET SIGCFG: TT=ST3, SPC=TRUE, SRC=SPD;
2) Set the dialing tone of the SPM to that of SM 31.
ADD SIGSLOT: MN=31, ST=ST3, SPM=FNCC;
z Example for SNPT Service Commands
Setting SNPT service
1) Set announcement access code to "119".

3-148
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

SET PPSCFG: SNPTC=K'119;


2) Add prefixes for SNPT services and set intelligent service prefix to "119".
ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'119, CSTP=IN, CSA=LCO, MINL=3, MAXL=3, CHSC=65535;
3) Set intelligent DP for the prefix "119".
ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, CSC=0, CODE=K'119, DBLEN=3, SKEY=900;

For the SNPT service, set the "SERVICE KEY" parameter to "900".
4) Set module resource capability for SNPT services.
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=900, MN=255;

When the "MN" parameter is set to "255", it means that all modules have resource
capability for the service.
5) Set resource search conditions
ADD SRCSRH: MDU=1, SRC=BRD, STATE=USE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=2, MDU2=3,
MDU3=4, MDU4=5;

Set the resource search method of SPT board on module 1 to fixed search in
command example. Start search from module 2 each time.
6) Set languages index for prompt tone.
ADD INLNG: LI=1, LT1=64;

Language index 1 represents English.


7) Add prompt tone for prefix "119".
ADD PFXPRO: PFX=K'119, CSC=0, STF=SDPT, PTT=PT6;

The parameter "SEND TONE" needs to select "SENDING PROMPT TONE". The
parameter "PROMPT TONE TYPE" is used to set the needed prompt tone types.

Note:
z SNPT services support 20 prompt tone types at most.
z Centrex subscribers can also use the SNPT service. The switch does not support dialing Centrex
short numbers. Therefore, Centrex subscribers need to dial the prefixes of outgoing calls and then to
dial specified prefixes.

8) Set software parameters


MOD SFP: ID=P127, VAL="0xefff";

The command means that the switch will support the PPS procedures.

3-149
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Besides, there are six more software parameters for the SNPT service, which
respectively control whether to send the SNPT to ordinary subscribers, priority
subscribers, operator subscribers, data subscribers, test subscribers, and payphone
subscribers. Except for those subscribers whose calling category is data, tones are
sent to the other subscribers.

MOD SFP: ID=P92, VAL="fffe"; Not send the SNPT to ordinary subscribers

MOD SFP: ID=P92, VAL="fffd"; Not send the SNPT to priority subscribers

MOD SFP: ID=P92, VAL="fffb"; Not send the SNPT to operator subscribers

MOD SFP: ID=P92, VAL="fff7"; Send the SNPT to data subscribers

MOD SFP: ID=P92, VAL="ffef"; Not send the SNPT to test subscribers

MOD SFP: ID=P92, VAL="ffdf"; Not send the SNPT to payphone subscribers
9) Add announcement authority to corresponding trunk groups.
MOD N7TG: TG=90, SVRCTRL=SVR5-1;

This configuration represents playing special-number prompt tone for trunk group 90.
Set the parameter "SOFT PARA OF SERVICE CTRL" to "SEND SPECIAL NUMBER
PROMPT TONE".

After setting the above data, SNPT services can be used.

Cancelling SNPT service

Be default, the SNPT service is provided to all subscribers of the local office. To
cancel this service for local office subscribers, use commands ADD ST/MOD ST and
MOD NSR. When you use them, you need to select "NOT SEND SPECIAL NUMBER
PROMPT TONE" from the values of the parameter "SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE".

Note:
The command LST NSVUSER can be used to query the numbers and detailed information of canceling
the local SNPT service subscribers.

3.73 Telephone Set Self-Test

I. Meaning

This service is used for checking whether the phone set has faults.

3-150
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

PQABCD Number of Subscriber A

909 Phone set self-test service prefix


z Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the voice prompt for reporting his/her own
Subscriber A dials 909PQABCD
number
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the music

IV. Example

Suppose the number of Subscriber A is 8880001, the phone set self-test service
prefix is 909, the minimum length of a number is 3 digits, and the maximum length is
10 digits.
z Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the voice prompt for reporting his/her own
Subscriber A dials 9098880001
number 8880001
Subscriber A hangs up Subscriber A hears the ringing tone
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the music

3-151
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Note:
z Only analog subscribers can use this service.
z Bit 15 of call internal parameter 3 can control the type of the voice prompt that subscribers hear for
the first time after dialing the number.
1: hear his/her own number;
0: hear the music.

3.74 Temporary Booking CLIP and CLIR

I. Meaning

The caller can set through the service prefix to display or restrict the display of the
caller number. The subscribers are classified into three categories as follows:
1) Subscribers of category A: allowed to display the caller number to the callee, but
the caller number will not be displayed if restriction prefix is added to the callee
(with "CLIP" authority and "temporary booking CLIP" authority).
2) Subscribers of category B: not allowed to display the caller number to the callee,
but allowed to display the caller number to the callee if corresponding permission
prefix is added to the callee (with "CLIR authority" and "temporary booking CLIR"
authority).
3) Subscribers of category C: not allowed to display the caller number to the callee,
even if they dial the permission prefix before the callee number (with "permanent
booking CLIR" authority).

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "temporary booking CLIP or CLIR" authority (you can use the
command ADD ST or MOD ST to set it), and the service has been registered in the
"supplementary service".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber whose number is ABCDEF

B Callee whose number is PQRLMN


z Subscriber A belongs to category A.
1) Service registration

3-152
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.


2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber A dials PQRLMN ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays ABCDEF
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber A dials ringing tone.
*62PQRLMN
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talks with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
z Subscriber A belongs to category B.
4) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
5) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials PQRLMN the ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials *68PQRLMN the ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays ABCDEF
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3-153
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

6) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
z Subscriber A belongs to category C.
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials PQRLMN the ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials *68PQRLMN the ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A’s number is 8883850, and Subscriber B’s number is 8883851.
z Subscriber A belongs to category A.
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation

3-154
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials 8883851 the ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "8883850"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials *628883851 the ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
z Subscriber A belongs to category B.
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber A dials 8883851 ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears the
Subscriber A dials ringing tone.
*688883851
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "8883850"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

3-155
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
z Subscriber A belongs to category C.
4) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
5) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials 8883851 the ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials *688883851 the ringing tone.
Subscriber B’s telephone set displays "Private"
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscribers A and B hang up Subscriber A ends the talk with Subscriber B

6) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
When MCID service is registered, the Telecommunication Office is able to provide the number of the
caller even if the caller restricts the provision of the number.

3.75 Three-Party Service

I. Meaning

When Subscriber A is talking with Subscriber B, if there is a need for Subscriber C


(the third party) to join the conversation, Subscriber A can dial the third party number

3-156
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

without interrupting the conversation with Subscriber B to achieve the three-party


communication or conversation with either party.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "3PTY" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or MOD
ST to set it).

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

B, C Callees
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials the telephone number of Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
Subscriber B Subscriber B hears the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscriber B hears the music
Subscriber A dials the number of Subscriber Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and
C Subscriber C hears the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone,
Subscriber A presses the hook
Subscribers B and C hear the music
Subscriber A talks with one party, and the other
Subscriber A dials 1
party hears the busy tone
Subscriber A talks with one party, and the other
Subscriber A dials 2
party hears the music
Subscriber A dials 3 Subscribers A, B and C talk with each other
If Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers B and C hear the busy tone
If Subscriber B or C hangs up Subscriber A talks with another party

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-157
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

IV. Example

If Subscriber B's number is 8883850 and Subscriber C's number is 8883851, the
operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber B hears
Subscriber A dials 8883850
the ringing tone
Subscriber B hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber B
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscriber B
Subscriber A presses the hook
hears the music

Subscriber A hears the ring back tone, and Subscriber C hears


Subscriber A dials 8883851
the ringing tone
Subscriber C hooks off Subscriber A talks with Subscriber C
Subscriber A hears the special dialing tone, and Subscribers B
Subscriber A presses the hook
and C hear the music
Subscriber A talks with one party, and the other party hears the
Subscriber A dials 1
busy tone
Subscriber A talks with one party, and the other party hears the
Subscriber A dials 2
music
Subscriber A dials 3 Subscribers A, B and C talk with each other
If Subscriber A hangs up Subscribers B and C hear the busy tone
If Subscriber B or C hangs up Subscriber A talks with another party

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
When applying for the three-party service, the subscriber cannot apply for all outgoing call restriction
services at the same time.

3-158
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.76 Trunk Interrupt

I. Meaning

By applying this service, the operator can interrupte the conversation on the
designated trunk.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of the command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Operator

MMM Module number

TTTTT Trunk circuit number


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A disconnects the trunk circuit TTTTT of module
*92*MMM*TTTTT# MMM.
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-159
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

IV. Example

Suppose the trunk circuit to be disconnected is 10 of module 1, the operation process


is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials
Subscriber A disconnects the trunk circuit 10 of module 1
*92*001*00010#
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z This service is for operator only, but the operator cannot be a Centrex subscriber.
z The module number and the trunk circuit number must be valid.
z For the following circumstances, conversation on the designated trunk cannot be disconnected:
a) The designated trunk is in idle state;
b) The designated trunk is occupied by internet calls;
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.77 Trunk Intrusion

I. Meaning

By applying this service, the operator can break in the conversation on the designated
trunk.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

3-160
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of the command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Operator

MMM Module number

TTTTT Trunk circuit number


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A intrudes the conversation on the trunk
Subscriber A dials *90*MMM*TTTTT#
circuit TTTTT of module MMM.
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended.

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose the trunk circuit to be intruded is 10 of module 1, the operation process is as


follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A intrudes the conversation on the trunk circuit 10 of
*90*001*00010# module 1

Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation

3-161
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z This service is for operator only, but the operator cannot be a Centrex subscriber.
z The module number and the trunk circuit number must be valid.
z For the following circumstances, conversation on the designated trunk cannot be intruded:
a) The designated trunk is in idle state;
b) The designated trunk is occupied by internet calls;
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3.78 Trunk Monitoring

I. Meaning

By using this service, the operator can monitor the conversation on the designated
trunk.

Note:
The function is for operator only.

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of the command ADD
CNACLD.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Operator

MMM Module number

TTTTT Trunk circuit number


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation

3-162
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the conversation on the trunk circuit TTTTT
*91*MMM*TTTTT# of module MMM
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

IV. Example

Suppose the trunk circuit to be monitored is 10 of module 1, the operation process is


as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials Subscriber A hears the conversation on the trunk circuit 10 of
*91*001*00010# module 1

Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z This service is for operator only, but the operator cannot be a Centrex subscriber.
z The module number and the trunk circuit number must be valid.
z For the following circumstances, conversation on the designated trunk cannot be monitored:
a) The designated trunk is in idle state;
b) The designated trunk is occupied by internet calls;
z This service is not applicable to the pulse phone.

3-163
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

3.79 Voice Recording

I. Meaning

This service enables the operator to record the voice announcement carried over
several designated timeslots.

II. Setting conditions

The service has been registered in the "service attribute" of the command ADD
CNACLD.

Note:
This service is for operator only.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Operator

MMM Module number

NNN Timeslots to be recorded; it can be only timeslot 0, 1, 34 or 35 (when the signal


tone board is CB01) or any timeslot except timeslot 9 (when the signal tone board is
CB02, and two CB02s are configured at the same time).
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials After hearing the music for 3 seconds, Subscriber A can record
*79*MMM*NNN# voice announcements carried by the designated timeslots
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

3-164
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

IV. Example

If Subscriber A is to record the timeslot 34, the operation process is as follows:


1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials After hearing the music for 3 seconds, Subscriber A can record
*79*001*034# voice announcements carried by the designated timeslots
Subscriber A hangs up Service ended

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z The maximum recording duration is 64 seconds.
z This service cannot be applied on the pulse phone.

3.80 Voltage Ascending Mode Voice Message

I. Meaning

The subscriber using this service can check whether there exists any voice message
by observing the indicator on the telephone.

II. Use

When there is a message in the subscriber's voice mailbox or the operator has
configured voice message indicator for the subscriber, the subscriber will hear voice
message announcement instead of common dialing tone after off-hook when the
voice message indicator is on.

After the subscriber finishes hearing the voice message in the voice mailbox or the
operator has cancelled voice message indicator for the subscriber, the subscriber will
hear the common dialing tone after off-hook when the voice message indicator is off.

3-165
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

III. Note

z The configuration of voice message indicator requires for the telephone with
relevant functions.
z See Console Operation Manual for the operation of configuring voice message
indicator.
z After voice mailbox is configured, whether the indicator will be on or not is
determined by the configuration of the voice mailbox system.
z When bit 13 of the internal call parameter 1 is set to 0, the subscriber will hear
the common dialing tone after off-hook when the indicator is on.
z When bit 13 of the internal call parameter 1 is set to 1, the subscriber will hear
voice message announcement or special dialing tone instead of the common
dialing tone after off-hook when the indicator is on. And when bit 2 of the internal
call parameter 1 is set to 1, the subscriber will hear the voice message
announcement, 0 special dialing tone.

3.81 Wake up Service

I. Meaning

When the time specified by the subscriber arrives, the telephone rings to remind the
subscriber to do what he/she has planned.

With Multiple Wakeup service, the subscriber can be waken up by the switch at the
same predetermined time every day.

II. Setting conditions

The subscriber has the "wakeup" authority (you can use the command ADD ST or
MOD ST to set it), the service has been registered in the "supplementary service"..

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Service subscriber

HH Hours set by the subscriber (00~23)

MM Minutes set by the subscriber (00~59)


1) Service registration

3-166
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *55*HHMM# (on Dual
Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) phone) or
155HHMM (on pulse phone) Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
the successful service registration
*60*HHMM# (DTMF phone) or 160HHMM
(Pulse phone) for multi-wakeup service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
The wake up service is a one-time service. When the specified time arrives, the
telephone rings automatically. You will hear the prompt voice if picking up the handset,
and afterwards, this service will be cancelled. The ringing will stop if the telephone
rings for one minute without being picked up. Five minutes later, the telephone will
ring again for one minute, and if still no one answers, this service will be cancelled
automatically.

For the multi-wakeup service, when the preset time arrives each day, the "Multiple
wake up" is used in the same way as using the "wake up" once within 24 hours. The
multiple wake up will not be cancelled after it is used, and on the second day, when
the preset time arrives, it will be used again.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #55# (on DTMF phone) or
151155 (on Pulse phone) Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
#60# (DTMF phone) or 151160 (Pulse phone) the successful service cancellation
for multi-wakeup service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

IV. Example

If the time specified by Subscriber A is 12: 20, that is, HH=12, MM=20, the operation
process is as follows:
1) Service registration

3-167
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 PSTN Supplementary Services

Operation Expected result


Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials *55*1220# (on DTMF
phone) or 1551220 (on Pulse phone) Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
*60*1230# (DTMF phone) or 1601230 (Pulse the successful service registration
phone) for multi-wakeup service
Subscriber A hangs up Service registered

2) Service operation
When the specified time 12:20 arrives, the telephone rings automatically. You will
hear the prompt voice by picking up the handset, and afterwards, this service will be
cancelled. The ringing will stop if the telephone rings for one minute without being
picked up. Five minutes later, the telephone will ring again for one minute, and if still
no one answers, this service will be cancelled automatically.

For the multi-wakeup service, after successful registration, at 12:30 each day, the
switch will automatically send ringing tone to Subscriber A, when Subscriber A hooks
off, he hears the wake up prompt tone; if Subscriber A does not hook off for 5 minutes,
the switch will again send the ringing tone to him. The switch will ring his telephone
set at most twice every day.
3) Service cancellation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber A hooks off Subscriber A hears the dialing tone
Subscriber A dials #55# (on DTMF phone) or
151155 (on Pulse phone) Subscriber A hears the acknowledgement tone of
#60# (DTMF phone) or 151160(Pulse phone) the successful service cancellation
for multi-wakeup service
Subscriber A hangs up Service cancelled

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for alarm service and do-not-disturb service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for alarm service and absent subscriber service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for alarm service and call forwarding service.

3-168
HUAWEI

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System


Operation Manual – Supplementary Services
Volume

Centrex Services
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services .................................................................................... 1-1

Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services ............................................................................................... 2-1


2.1 Basic Call Services ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Centrex Operator Services ................................................................................................ 2-2

Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services .............................................................................. 3-1

i
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services

Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services

With the fast development of computer technology and multimedia technology, the
switching equipment providing only the voice switching services over the
telecommunication network is not able to meet the demands of subscribers in the new
era. The Central Exchange (Centrex) of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System
(shortened as C&C08 Switch hereinafter) integrates Narrow-band ISDN (N-ISDN)
with IN services to provide the business subscribers with a wide range of qualified
services.

Centrex means to group part of the subscribers (for example, a company) connected
to the switches into a virtual Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) subscriber
group, and to provide them with the PABX services. In addition, this subscriber group
enjoys some special telecom services. Centrex is suitable for factories, mines,
enterprises, universities and colleges, hospitals, government organs, group
companies, hotels and financial institutions.

C&C08 Switch supports up to 65,535 Centrex groups, each of which can be divided
into 256 sub-groups. The number of subscribers of each Centrex group is subject
only to the capacity of the switch concerned, without any other restrictions. The
software of the switch provides all the Centrex functions. Each Centrex subscriber
has two numbers, one is the PSTN number, called the long number; the other is the
short number used to call subscribers within the Centrex group. To use the Centrex
services, you do not need to add or change any hardware equipment other than the
operator console. The Centrex subscribers and common subscribers have the same
hardware interfaces. The Centrex subscribers include ordinary subscribers, ISDN
subscribers, and access network subscribers, featuring easy access, free distribution
of subscribers, and flexible processing of scattered subscribers. The subscribers in
the same Centrex group can be distributed in multiple Remote Switching Modules
(RSMs) and Remote Subscriber Areas (RSAs), and may be distributed in other offices
as well.

With the development of the Centrex, C&C08 Switch has been able to provide the
Wide Area Centrex (WAC) interface, which helps to group the Centrex groups
scattered in different offices into a specialized network. The intra-WAC calls are
completed by the local office, and the inter-WAC calls are completed with the help of
the SCP and Service Switching Point (SSP) over the CCS7 signaling network.

Compared to the traditional PBX, the Centrex has the following advantages:
1) Users can enjoy all the advanced functions without purchasing any PBX.

1-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Overview of Centrex Services

2) Users do not need to invest in the switching equipment, equipment room and
power supply equipment, or to train the management and maintenance
personnel of the PBX equipment.
3) The PBX subscribers are confined to a PBX, but the Centrex subscribers can be
distributed widely without any geographical restrictions. Therefore, the expansion
gets facilitated without any capacity limitations.
4) The services and functions enjoyed by the Centrex subscribers are automatically
upgraded along with the upgrading of the switch to a higher version.
5) The number of trunks restricts the incoming and outgoing calls made by the PBX
subscribers, but there is no such restriction to the Centrex subscribers. Both the
incoming and outgoing calls are all connected in the Direct Outward Dialing-1
(DOD1)/ Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Outward Dialing-2 (DOD2) modes.
6) Both subscribers and equipment are managed by the Telecommunication Office
whose high-level maintenance and management ensure the stable and reliable
operation of such equipment.

Note:
Unless otherwise noted, the following Centrex services are all applicable to the WAC.

1-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

C&C08 Switch supplies the following basic services. To use them, first set Centrex
subscriber data. For the data setting, please refer to Chapter 5 of the subscriber data
volume of the operation manual. This chapter elaborates the Centrex services and
matters for attention.

2.1 Basic Call Services

I. Intra-group call

When a Centrex subscriber calls another subscriber of the same Centrex group,
he/she can choose to dial either the short number of the callee or the "outgoing
prefix” plus the long number. Use the command ADD CXPFX to set the service prefix,
with service attribute being "Centrex intra-group”.

II. Out-group call

A Centrex subscriber can make out-group calls after dialing the out-group prefix. Use
the command ADD ST to set the call-out authority.

III. Secondary dialing tone

When the Centrex subscribers have the authority of making outgoing calls, they first
dial the "outgoing prefix” to listen to the secondary dialing tone, and then dial the
numbers of out-group subscribers. Use the command ADD CXGRP to set the
secondary dialing tone.

IV. Distinctive ringing

Centrex subscribers can set different ringing modes for intra-group and out-group
incoming calls so as to differentiate them. Use the command ADD CXGRP to set
different ringing modes.

V. Intra-group outgoing call restricted

It is to restrict Centrex subscribers from making intra-group calls. Use the command
ADD ST to set the call-out authority.

2-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

VI. Out-group outgoing call restricted

It is to restrict Centrex subscribers from making out-group calls. Use the command
ADD ST to set the call-out authority.

VII. Intra-group incoming call restricted

It is to restrict Centrex subscribers from receiving intra-group calls. Use the command
ADD ST to set the call-in authority.

VIII. Incoming call restricted

It is to restrict Centrex subscribers from receiving incoming calls. Use the command
ADD ST to set the call-in authority.

IX. Out-group direct dial in

When a non-Centrex subscriber calls a Centrex subscriber, he/she can directly dial
the long number of the subscriber.

X. Emergency outgoing call

The Centrex subscribers can directly make emergency calls, such as fire call and
police call, without dialing the outgoing prefix, but they are required to make a
Centrex call prefix record, with its attribute as "out-group emergency call” by
command ADD CXPFX. You can also make only one ordinary Centrex group call
prefix record, and change the number into "outgoing prefix + emergency call prefix”.

2.2 Centrex Operator Services

I. Operator position

A subscriber of a Centrex group can be set as an operator. To set an operator, use


the command ADD CXCON.

II. Operator's access code

Centrex subscribers can directly make calls to the operator by only dialing an access
code, which can be set by the command ADD CXCON.

III. Call forwording to operator on busy

When a non-Centrex subscriber calls a Centrex subscriber and the called subscriber
is busy, the call can be forwarded to the operator. Use the command MOD CXGRP to
set this service.

2-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

IV. Call forwarding to operator on no reply

When a non-Centrex subscriber calls a Centrex subscriber and the called subscriber
has not answered the call for a long time, the call can be forwarded to the operator.
Use the command MOD CXGRP to set this service.

V. Operator monitoring

The operator can monitor any local call of an ordinary subscriber of the Centrex group.
For its service prefix and operation procedures, refer to the section "PSTN
Supplementary Services" in this manual.

VI. Forced intrusion by operator

The operator can forcedly intrude into any local call of an ordinary subscriber of the
Centrex group. For its service prefix and operation procedures, refer to the section
"PSTN Supplementary Services" in this manual.

VII. Forced release by operator

The operator can forcedly release any local call of an ordinary subscriber of the
Centrex group. Its service prefix is generally set to "*89*". For the operation
procedures, refer to the section "PSTN Supplementary Services" in this manual.

VIII. Operator override DDS

When the Do-not-Disturb Service is set for a Centrex subscriber, the "operator
override DDS" service will enable the operator to override the DDS and call the
subscriber. Use the command ADD CXPFX to set its service prefix. For operation
procedures, refer to the section "PSTN Supplementary Services" in this manual.

IX. Operator log-in service

With this service, a Centrex subscriber can change his/her attribute into operator, so
he/she can have the function of the operator. Its service prefix is generally set to
"*65#".

2-3
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Centrex Basic Services

Note:
z Only the Centrex subscriber can carry out operator registration and cancellation. When the
subscriber is registered as operator, he/she can implement monitoring, insertion or deletion
operations.
z When the subscriber is registered as operator, he/she temporarily owns the operator attributes. In
setting subscriber data next time, the operator attributes will be lost.
z The pulse phone cannot use this service.

X. Operator cancellation service

This service enables a Centrex subscriber to change his/her attribute from an


operator into an ordinary subscriber. Its service prefix is generally set to "#65#".

Note:
The services in this chapter are the special services of Centrex operators. For other operator services,
for example, Operator Call Barring Service, please refer to the section "PSTN Supplementary Services"
in this manual.

2-4
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services

Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services

Besides the Centrex basic services, Centrex subscribers can enjoy the
supplementary services of ordinary PSTN subscribers. As there are too many Centrex
supplementary services, this chapter only lists the distinguish from the PSTN
supplementary services. The meaning, operation methods and restrictions of a
Centrex supplementary service are the same as those of the PSTN supplementary
service with the same name. For details, please refer to the section "PSTN
Supplementary Services" in this manual.

Note:
z Centrex supplementary services can use the same service prefixes as PSTN supplementary
services, or new service prefixes (defined by the command ADD CXPFX). It should be noted that the
newly defined service prefixes should not conflict with the intra-group call prefix and out-group call
prefix.
z The register subscribers of Centrex supplementary services are all Centrex subscribers.
z The called party of a Centrex supplementary service may belong to a Centrex group or not. When
the callee belongs to no Centrex group, the out-group prefix must precede the called number.
Otherwise, the system will prompt a fault.
z Unless otherwise specified, all the following services are applicable to the intra-group call and
out-group call.

z Assigned Pickup Call in Group


When a Centrex subscriber's phone rings, another subscriber of the same Centrex
group can answer the call by dialing the assigned pickup access code and the short
number of the ringing phone.

Note:
z This service is available for out-group ordinary subscriber (using the long number) and the
intra-group subscribers (using the extension number).
z A Centrex subscriber can not perform pickup for an out-group subscriber.

z Booking Call

3-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services

To register the service, the prefix is generally "*28*". To cancel the service, the prefix
is generally "#28#".
z Cancel All Registered Services
Generally, to register the service, the prefix is "*22*".
z Caller Hooking
When a non-Centrex subscriber calls a Centrex subscriber, the callee can forward the
call to another Centrex subscriber by first pressing the hook then dialing the short
number of the forward-to Centrex subscriber.
z Co-group pickup call in Centrex
Some subscribers of a Centrex group can form a group. When a subscriber's phone
in the group rings, another subscriber of the same group can directly answer the call
by dialing only the pickup access code.

You can use ADD ST or MOD ST to set it, the supplementary service should select
the "co-group pickup call".

Note:
z The Centrex group cannot cross several modules.
z If several extensions ring at the same time, the pickup priority should be determined according to the
ringing order.

z Hotline (applicable to only out-group long numbers)


z List Conference
Generally, to register the service, the prefix is "*21*". To use the service, the prefix is
"*23*". To reject a party, the prefix is "#23*". To cancel a party, the prefix is "#21*". To
cancel all conference parties, the prefix is "#22*".
z Multiple Wake-ups
To register the service, the prefix is generally "*54*". To cancel the service, the prefix
is generally "#54#".
z Number Barring
To register the service, the prefix is generally "*542*". To cancel the service, the prefix
is generally "#543*".
z Password Call
Its service prefix is generally set to "*32*".
z Registered Call (applicable to only intra-group short numbers)
z Remote Activation of the CFB

3-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Centrex Supplementary Services

The function is only valid to the subscribers in the same Centrex group.
z Remote Activation of the CFNR
The function is only valid to the subscribers in the same Centrex group.
z Remote Activation of the CFU
The function is only valid to the subscribers in the same Centrex group.
z Secretary
Bit 6 of CCB internal parameter 4 decides whether the call from the Centrex group is
directly connected to the manager or transferred by the secretary. If bit 6 is 1 (default
value), all calls go to the secretary first. If bit 6 is 0, calls from the Centrex group
directly go to the manager.

3-3
HUAWEI

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System


Operation Manual – Supplementary Services
Volume

ISDN Services
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System ...................................................................................... 1-1


1.1 Features of the C&C08 ISDN ............................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Network Structure and Signaling Composition of C&C08 ISDN........................................ 1-2
1.2.1 ISDN Network Structure.......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 ISDN Signaling Composition................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 ISDN Interface......................................................................................................... 1-4

Chapter 2 ISDN Services .............................................................................................................. 2-1


2.1 Basic Services ................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Bearer Services ................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3 User Integrated Services ................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 Supplementary Services.................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5 Centrex Services................................................................................................................ 2-4

i
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is developed on the basis of the
Integrated Digital Telephone Network (IDN). It provides the end to end digital
connection and supports several kinds of telecom services, including the voice
services and non-voice services. The subscribers can be accessed to the network
through the standard subscriber-network interfaces.

The C&C08 ISDN offers multi-purpose subscriber-network interfaces and supports


the interconnection with other networks. It fulfills the compatibility of the analog
subscribers with the digital subscribers and smooth transition, integrates the
telephone communication and the data communication, and realizes the complete
digitization.

1.1 Features of the C&C08 ISDN

The C&C08 ISDN (that is, the C&C08 Switch) supports the end to end digital
connection by offering the digital telephone network. It aims at providing a series of
comprehensive services (including voice services and non-voice services) and offers
the subscribers a group of limited and standard subscriber-network interfaces.

The C&C08 ISDN has three basic features:


z End to end digital connection
At the place where the subscribers are accessed to the switch, it supports 2B+D,
23B+D, 30B+D and nB+mD standard interfaces. Among them, D channel is 64 kbit/s
bearer channel. D channel is 16 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s signaling channel.

Dgital Dgital Dgital


Subscriber Transmission End Transmission End Transmission Subscriber
Terminal office office Terminal

Figure 1-1 ISDN schematic diagram

z Integrated services
The C&C08 ISDN supports various integrated services such as voice, data, text and
picture services, and also supports the interconnection between several kinds of
networks. For example, it supports the interconnection between the Public Switched

1-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

Telephone Network (PSTN), the Packet Switched Public Data Network (PSPDN), the
Frame Relay (FR) network, the Internet and the Local Area Network (LAN).
z Standard network interface
Different services and terminals can be accessed to the network through a unified
interface.

In addition to the above basic features, the C&C08 ISDN has the following features:
z It supports the semi-permanent B channel access service, exchangeable B
channel access service, D channel semi-permanent access service and D
channel Permanent Logic Link (PLL) service.
z It supports the user terminal services, such as telephone service, fax service,
video telephone, videotex and data communication.
z It supports the supplementary service.
z The various remote modules support the access of the ISDN subscribers.
z It has consummate signaling system.
z The slots of the interface boards are compatible with each other. The protocol
processing boards have the same hardware; they can be loaded with different
protocols software and can accomplish the processing of different signaling
types. This makes the adding of the ISDN subscribers economical and flexible.
z The C&C08 ISDN offers consummate maintenance and test method.
z It enjoys rich experience in network construction.
z It supports the charging according to ports.
z It supports the Digital Data Network (DDN) sub-rate and multiple rate access.
z It supports the mixed networking of the Primary Rate Access (PRA) with the
Telephone User Part (TUP) and ISDN User Part (ISUP) and supports the control
of several PCMs by one PRA signaling link. In the system, several subscribers
on the PRA port can be divided into different groups, and in each group different
authority controls and B-channel selections can be performed.

1.2 Network Structure and Signaling Composition of C&C08


ISDN

1.2.1 ISDN Network Structure

The basic structure of ISDN is shown in Figure 1-2.

1-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

ISDN network

Packet switching
capability

Subscriber information
Subscriber information Circuit switching ISDN
ISDN TE
TE
switch capability switch

None- swithcing
connection
capability

Subscriber-network signaling Subscriber-network signaling


Public channel
signaling
capability

Subcriber-subsriber signaling

Figure 1-2 Basic structure of ISDN

ISDN has several kinds of service capabilities to bear different services:


z Circuit switching capability
z Packet switching capability
z None-switching connection capability
z Public channel signaling capability

1.2.2 ISDN Signaling Composition

All signaling systems of the ISDN adopt the public channel signaling mode. The
signaling channels are separated from the subscriber information channel. It is shown
in Figure 1-3.

User-User Signaling (UUS)

Inter-office
DSS1 Signaling DSS1
TE ISDN ISDN TE
Switch Switch
Subscriber Terminal Subscriber Terminal

Figure 1-3 C&C08 ISDN signaling system

The signaling systems used by ISDN include the inter-office signaling, Digital
Subscriber Signaling No.1 (DSS1) and User to User Signaling (UUS).
z Inter-office signaling

1-3
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

It refers to the control signal between the ISDN switches. The signaling can be the
ISUP message in the No. 7 signaling. It is also supported by the PRA interface in the
DSS1. The ISUP is one kind of the User Parts (UP) of the No. 7 public channel
signaling system. It provides the necessary signal functions to the basic bearer
services and supplementary services which support the voice and non-voice functions
in ISDN.
z Subscriber-network signaling
It refers to the control signal between the user terminal and the network. The
signaling is DSS1 and the inter-office signaling is similar to that in the ISUP.
z Subscriber-subscriber signaling
It refers to the control signal between the user terminal equipments. The channel of
the signaling is provided by the DSS1 and ISUP. The signaling is transparently
transmitted in the network and is called UUS.

1.2.3 ISDN Interface

The C&C08 ISDN provides the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface
(PRI). It also offers two kinds of communication channels, namely B channel (64
kbit/s) to bear the service and D channel (16 kbit/s) to transmit the call control
signaling and the management information. Besides, it provides the Packet Handling
Interface (PHI) interface to interconnect with the PSPDN.

I. BRI

The rate of the BRI interface (2B+D) is 144 kbit/s. The BRI supports two 64 kbit/s
subscriber channels (B channels) and one 16 kbit/s signaling channel (D channel). It
can be used by several ISDN equipments. Two B channels bound together can
provide the transmission at a rate of 128 kbit/s. By using the compression calculation
method, the transmission speed will be higher. One BRI interface can be connected
to eight terminals. It supports the point-to-multipoint configuration. Each terminal can
have independent ISDN number or sub-addressing.

The BRI interface board of the C&C08 ISDN is the Digital Subscriber Line board
(DSL). The slots of the DSL are completely compatible with the slots of the Analog
Subscriber Line board (ASL). This facilitates the subscriber capacity expansion. In
terms of the physical line, the DSL adopts the 2B1Q code type. Each DSL provides
eight User interfaces (U interfaces), and fulfills the digitization of eight twisted pairs.
The U interface meets the requirements specified in ITU-T Recommendations G.960.

II. PRI

According to different intervals divided in the PCM system (E1=32 timeslot (TS),
T1=24TS), the PRI/PRA is divided into the 30B+D interface (adopted in China and

1-4
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Introduction to ISDN System

Europe) and 23B+D interface (adopted in North America and Japan). The rate of the
30B+D interface is 2048 kbit/s. The interface supports thirty 64 kbit/s subscriber
channels (B channels) and one 64 kbit/s signaling channel (D channel).

The PRI unit of the C&C08 ISDN comprises the interface circuit board (PRA) and the
protocol processing board (LAPPRA). It provides thirty 64 kbit/s B channels and one
64 kbit/s D channel. The PRA board mainly fulfills the PRI functions, which include the
extraction of the synchronization clock, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and D
channel transparent transmission. The LAPPRA board processes the DSS1 of the link
layer and network layer sent from D channel. Besides, it communicates with the main
processor to fulfill the circuit switching and call control processing.

1-5
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Chapter 2 ISDN Services

The basic task of the ISDN is to offer the subscribers with integrated, comprehensive
and diversified services. The ISDN services must be complete, be able to ensure the
end-to-end compatibility, adopt the standard service processing and fulfill the
top-quality communication between the terminal subscribers national wide and
international wide.

The classification of the ISDN services is shown in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Applications of the C&C08 ISDN services

Bandwidt Service
h Telephone Data Text Picture
Packet switched
data Subscriber
telegraph
Circuit switched
data Intelligent
Telephone subscriber
Leased circuit Video terminal
Leased telegraph
telephone Remote Fax
Leased circuit
64 kbit/s measurement
Information Videotext Information retrieval
retrieval (through Funds transfer
voice analysis Information Monitoring
Information retrieval
and synthesis) retrieval
Mailbox
Mailbox
E-mail
E-mail
Alarm

High-speed Video conference


computer Video data
communication
>64 kbit/s Music Videophone
LAN interconnection
Cable television
Internet access (TV)

The service attributes of the C&C08 ISDN are introduced in the following part.

2-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2.1 Basic Services

ISDN basic services comprise bearer services and user integrated services
(tele-services). Bearer services are provided by the network (switching system), while
the user integrated services are provided by the terminal that originates the service
request.

Therefore, the attributes of the basic service are comprehensive and diversified. They
can be created by combining the description of the user integrated service (described
through the higher layer consistency) defined by the ITU_T/ European
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) or service attributes defined by
specific countries with the description of the bearer service (described through the
bearer capability) defined by the ITU_T/ETSI. Each subscriber of the C&C08 IDSN
has the following basic service attributes:
1) Voice
2) Unrestricted_Digital_Info
3) 3.1 kHz Audio
4) 77 kHz Audio
5) 3.1 kHz Telephony
6) 7 kHz Telephony
7) Telefax_Group 2/3
8) Teltfax_Group 4
9) Videotex_syntax
10) Teletex
11) Video_Telephony
12) Packet Services
C&C08 Switch has offered the following services for ISDN subscribers besides having
achieved the call connection between ISDN subscribers, between ISDN subscribers
and PSTN subscribers, and between ISDN subscribers and V5 subscribers.
z Point-to-point calling
In the case that the callee is a PRA subscriber or a Basic Rate Access (BRA)
subscriber and the called port has only one terminal, the terminal can prompt, answer
and release the call.
z Point-to-multi-point calling
When a call reaches a port, the multiple terminals of the port can simultaneously or
separately give prompts. If a terminal answers the call, other terminals will clear their
calls. In this case, the callee must be an ISDN BRA subscriber and the called terminal
must be an ordinary ISDN terminal which supports automatic allocation of Terminal
Endpoint Identifiers (TEI).
z PBX cyclic hunting function

2-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Several BRA or PRA ports can be set as cyclic hunting ports and the number of one
of them can be set to a PBX indicating/pilot number. When the PBX pilot number is
called, the switch will search a port which has idle B channels among the cyclic
hunting ports according to a certain rule and then send the call to the port.

2.2 Bearer Services

Bearer services are the information transport services provided by ISDN switch for
transparent information (including voice, data and picture) transmission between
subscribers. It corresponds to the functions in the lower three layers of Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) model.

ISDN-supported bearer services can be divided into circuit bearer services and
packet bearer services, according to the specific access mode.

I. Circuit bearer services

The circuit bearer services include circuit switching and semi-permanent connection.
1) 64 kbit/s and 8 kHz bearer service to transmit the voice information. The
processing technologies such as analog transmission, echo cancellation and low
bit rate coding suitable to the voice can be adopted. This kind of bearer service
provides the local, toll and international voice service between ISDN subscribers
as well as between ISDN subscriber and PSTN subscriber.
2) 64 kbit/s and 8 kHz bearer service to transmit the 3.1 kHz audio information. The
voice processing techniques (such as digital voice interpolation) must be
prohibited. This kind of bearer service provides local, toll and international 3.1
kHz data service between ISDN subscribers, between ISDN subscribers
(including ISDN remote subscriber and ISDN PBX (ISPBX) extension subscriber)
and the Modem or fax in the telephone network (including remote subscribers
and PBX subscribers).
3) Semi-permanent and exchangeable 64 kbit/s, 8 kHz bearer service to transmit
unrestricted digital information and provide 64 kbit/s transparent transmission.
This kind of bearer service provides the local, toll and international unrestricted
digital service between ISDN subscribers (including ISDN remote subscribers
and ISPBX extension subscribers).
4) Semi-permanent and exchangeable 2×64 kbit/s, 8 kHz bearer service to transmit
the unrestricted digital information. Bearer services of this kind provide local, toll
and semi-permanent transmission of n×64 kbit/s unrestricted data information
between ISDN subscribers (including ISDN remote subscribers).

2-3
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

II. Packet bearer services

Bearer services of this kind establish virtual circuits on the B-channel or D-channel at
the S/T reference point for transparent transmission of the subscriber information in
packets. The packet-switching function is provided by PSPDN.
z B-channel semi-permanent access service
By establishing semi-permanent B-channel connection with PSPDN through the local
PHI, the switch allows the ISDN subscribers to transmit over the B-channel the
signaling information of Virtual Calls (VC) and the maintenance information of
Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVC), and implements VC and PVC services between
ISDN packet subscribers (including the packet subscribers of ISDN remote modules)
and PSPDN subscribers, between ISDN packet subscribers or between ISDN and
PSTN packet subscribers.
z Exchangeable B-channel access service
By establishing exchangeable B-channel connection with PSPDN through the local
PHI, The switch allows the ISDN subscribers to transmit over the B-channel only the
signaling information of VCs, and provides VC services between ISDN packet
subscribers (including the packet subscribers of ISDN remote modules) and PSPDN
packet subscribers, between ISDN packet subscribers, or between ISDN and PSTN
packet subscribers.
z D-channel semi-permanent access service
Through the preset mode, the switch keeps the physical layer and the link layer of the
D-channel of the ISDN subscribers permanently activated, allows the ISDN
subscribers to transmit over the D-channel the signaling information of VCs and the
maintenance information of PVCs, and connects them to the PSPDN through the
local PHI so as to enable VC and PVC services between ISDN packet subscribers
(including the packet subscribers of ISDN remote modules) and packet switched
network subscribers, between ISDN packet subscribers, or between ISDN and PSTN
packet subscribers.
z D-channel PLL service
Through the preset mode, the switch can keep the physical layer of the D-channel of
ISDN subscribers permanently activated, while the link layer is connected at any time
when needed. The ISDN subscribers can transmit over the D-channel the signaling
information of VCs and the maintenance information of PVCs. The switch can also be
connected with the PSPDN through the local PHI to provide VC and PVC services
between ISDN packet subscribers (including the packet subscribers of ISDN remote
modules) and packet switched network subscribers, between ISDN packet
subscribers, or between ISDN and PSTN packet subscribers.

2-4
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2.3 User Integrated Services

User integrated (telecom) services are user-oriented services, including both the
network functions and the terminal equipment functions. These services correspond
to the functions in layer 1 to layer 7 of the OSI model, and are provided by the ISDN
switch and the corresponding ISDN terminals.

The C&C08 ISDN Switch, collaborated with ISDN terminals, provides the following
user integrated services:
1) Telephony: The telephony service provides the subscribers with the real time
bi-directional dialog capability exchangeable over the network. The voice
frequency is 3.1 kHz. The digital signals follow the specified voice coding rules.
The network uses digital signal processing technology. The user voice signals
are transmitted over B-channel, and the control signaling is transmitted over
D-channel.
2) Teletex: Teletex provides end-to-end message communication. It uses the
standard character set, standard format and communication protocol. Its high
layer characteristics are based on Conference Consultatif International du
Telephon et Telegraphie (CCITT) Teletex recommendations. The information
can be transmitted in circuit mode or in packet mode.
3) Telefax G4: Telefax G4 provides end-to-end fax communication. It uses the
standard graphic coding, resolution and communication protocol. Its high layer
characteristics are based on CCITT Telefax G4 recommendations. The
information can be transmitted in circuit mode or in packet mode.
4) Videotex: The ISDN Videotex is the enhanced version of the existing Videotex
service. It adds character and graphic information retrieval function and
electronic mailbox function to the original Videotex. The information can be
transmitted in circuit mode or packet mode.
5) Telex: Telex provides interactive message communication. Its digital information
above the ISDN physical layer conforms to international Telex protocols. ITU-T
recommends that Telex transmit information over the B-channel in the circuit
mode.
6) Telephony 7 kHz: This service can provide the subscribers with hi-fi realtime
bi-directional dialog switching over the network. Its bandwidth is up to 7 kHz.
7) Videophone: This service can simultaneously provide the subscribers with the
realtime bi-directional voice and video services switched over the network. The
voice and video information can be transmitted over either one B-channel or two
B-channels, depending on videophone terminals.
8) PC_Communication: This service can provide the subscribers with the realtime
bi-directional data communication switched over the network between Personal
Computers (PC) at different places. This service is also suitable for the
communication between workstations and servers.

2-5
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

9) Internet service: This service enables ordinary telephone subscribers to access


the Internet through the ISDN 2B+D subscriber line which achieves the access to
an Internet Service Provider (ISP) in the dial-up mode. In this case, the
telephone subscriber uses the communication rate of 128 kbit/s provided by the
basic rate interface (2B+D) and the ISP uses the 2 Mbit/s interface provided by
the primary rate interface (30B+D). The ISDN provides high-speed channels for
the Internet access. It is required that the whole course from one end to the other
end is ISDN. This service is available for all 2B+D and 30B+D subscribers.
10) The subscribers of the same PRA port can be classified into different groups so
as to set different authorities for the subscribers of different groups. In this way,
the subscribers of a group can have different authorities from those of another
group. The B channels of a PRA port can also be classified into different groups.
The subscribers of a group can use the B channels of a different group. This
service is available for all the 30B+D subscribers.

2.4 Supplementary Services

ISDN supplementary services are provided to the subscribers together with bearer
services and telecom services. The C&C08 ISDN supplementary services fully
conform to ITU-T recommendations. The keyboard protocol and functional protocol
are used in the operation and control of such supplementary services, so as to
improve the compatibility of terminals.

This section describes the principles and performances of the supplementary services
for ISDN terminal subscribers.

Note:
z Only the simple conception is described here. Please refer to Chapter 1 PSTN Services of this
manual for detailed description.
z The detailed operation procedures may vary due to the use of ISDN phone set. Please refer to the
phone set user manual for operation.
z The following services are also available for ISDN Centrex subscribers.

I. Multiple subscriber number (MSN)

The ISDN S/T interface can connect up to 8 terminals.

MSN provides the possibility to allocate multiple ISDN numbers to a single public or
private access. The MSN service allows each terminal connected to the S/T interface

2-6
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

to have one or more identifiers, so that a single terminal (for example, if the passive
bus is configured) can be distinguished from other terminals.

Subscribers should first apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service. The
Telecommunication Office will allocate a set of appropriate ISDN numbers (not
necessarily consecutive) to the subscriber. Through the agreement between the
subscriber and the Telecommunication Office, one of the allocated ISDN numbers will
be designated as the default number of the interface corresponding to the MSN
subscriber.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber whose ISDN number (default number) is 6540068 to port 68.
Connect two phones A and B to this port. Both the two phones have no MSN
authority;

2) Set the DSL subscriber whose number is 6540068 with the MSN authority;

3) Clear up all MSN numbers at phone A and configure an MSN number 6540069 to
phone B;

4) Pick up phone A. Because phone A is configured with no MSN number, the SETUP
message from the subscriber side to the network side does not include the calling
number information unit;

5) Pick up phone B. Because phone B is configured with an MSN number, the SETUP
message from the subscriber side to the network side includes the calling number
information unit;

6) If a subscriber dials 6540068 at phone C, phone A responds but phone B does not;

7) If a subscriber dials 6540069 at phone C, both phones A and B respond;

8) Delete the MSN number and remove the MSN authority from phone B. Then if a
subscriber dials 6540068 at phone C, the SETUP message from the network side to
the subscriber side does not include the called number and both phones A and B
respond (if only the MSN number is deleted but the MSN authority is not removed,
the SETUP message from the subscriber side to the network side still includes the
called number information unit but phone B does not ring);

9) Delete the MSN number from phone B and pick up the phone. Because phone B is
configured with the MSN number, the SETUP message from the subscriber side to
the network side includes the calling number information unit, but the network side
sends the correct number (the default port number) to the CC side after checking the
number;

10) Set phone B with the MSN number 6540000, inconsistent with the host data.

2-7
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

11) Pick up phone B. The SETUP message from the subscriber side to the network
side includes the calling number information unit, but the network side sends the
correct number (default port number) to the CC side after checking the number;

12) Set phone A(B) with the MSN number 6540000 in MML interface. If a subscriber
dials 6540068 (6540069) at phone C, the connection will fail.

Note:
z It cannot be registered simultaneously along with the Direct Dial In (DDI) service.
z When activating the MSN service, the caller shall provide his/her complete ISDN number when
originating an outgoing call. If the caller provides no caller number or the sent caller number is invalid,
the originating network shall use the default number corresponding to the caller access as the caller
number and send it to the callee.
z No matter whether a subscriber has the MSN authority, the subscriber's phone can be set with the
MSN number, which will be sent in the SETUP message when the subscriber makes a call. If the
subscriber's phone is not set with the MSN number, the SETUP message does not include the
calling number; if the subscriber's phone is set with the MSN number, the network side will check
whether the calling number in the SETUP message is consistent with the host MSN data. If yes, the
network side sends this number to the CC side; if no, the network side sends the default port number
to the CC side.
z The MSN service must be set in MML interface and on the phone as well.
z The call forwarding service is based on a single number. If the service subscriber has registered the
MSN service, the ISDN number used when activating/deactivating the call forwarding service can be
a MSN.

II. Sub-addressing (SUB)

The sub-addressing is used to identify multiple user terminal devices connected to the
same ISDN subscriber-network interface. Subscribers can set a sub-addressing of up
to 19 digits to distinguish from other terminals connected to the same interface. The
sub-addressing function expands the addressing capability, which was formerly
confined to one ISDN number. The sub-addressing function is similar to the MSN
function, but it requires the caller to transmit the number in "en bloc" mode since the
sub-addressing cannot be sent out in overlay mode. The advantage of using
sub-addressing is that it dose not occupy the limited ISDN number resources.

The service only specifies the transfer and use of the called sub-addressing. Other
sub-addressing information, such as caller sub-addressing and connected line
sub-addressing are not included in the description of the SUB service. Refer to the

2-8
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

CLIP and Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) for the detailed rules of
such information.

The service will be provided upon subscription. Subscribers can apply to the
Telecommunication Office for it. After registration, the caller inputs the called
sub-addressing when originating calls, and then the network will transparently
transmit the sub-addressing information.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540068 to port 68. Connect two phones A
and B to this port;

2) Add DSL subscriber C whose number is 6540064 to port 64;

3) Clear up all possible sub-addresses on phones A and B. Subscriber C dials


6540068;

4) Both phones A and B respond (two ALERTING messages from different CESs).
Pick up phone A, and the switch sends a RELEASE message to clear up the
subscriber who does not answer;

5) After this call ends, set the number 6540068 with the SUB service at the
maintenance console. Then subscriber C dials 6540068*456 (456 is the
sub-address);

6) Because neither phone is configured with a sub-address, both phones will


respond;

7) After this call ends, set phones A and B with sub-addresses 456 and 789
respectively. Then subscriber C dials 6540068*456;

8) Phone A responds but phone B does not;

9) After this call ends, set phones A and B with sub-addresses 456 and 789
respectively. Then subscriber C dials 6540068*789;

10) Phone B responds but phone A does not.

Note:
z The SUB service can be used only when all channels to carry the whole call support ISDN.
z If the sub-address is problematic (too long, for example), this information field will be discarded but
the SETUP message will still be sent.
z The SUB service is mainly concerned with the callee. In normal cases, the network transparently
transmits the sub-address reported by the caller and does not restrict it.
z The SUB service must be set in MML interface and on the phone as well.

2-9
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

III. Calling line identification presentation (CLIP)

With this function, the ISDN number of the caller will be displayed on the telephone
set of the called party, and the sub-address if possible.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber A whose number is 6540068 to port 68;

2) Add a DSL subscriber C whose number is 6540064 to port 64;

3) Subscribers A and C are set with no supplementary service authority. They do not
set MSN numbers either to their phones (they have sub-addresses);

4) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and the SETUP message of subscriber C's phone
from the subscriber side to the network side does not include the calling number (but
includes the sub-address). The network side includes the default number 6540064 in
the SETUP message and sends the message to the CC side. The SETUP message
of subscriber A's phone from the CC side to the network side includes the calling
number 6540064, but the SETUP message from the network side to the subscriber
side does not includes the calling number 6540064 (and does not include the
sub-address, because sending only the sub-address is meaningless) because the
CLIP service is not configured;

5) Register subscriber A with the CLIP service at the maintenance console;

6) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and the SETUP message of subscriber A's phone
from the network side to the subscriber side includes the calling number 6540064
(and the sub-address). subscriber A's phone displays the calling number 6540064
(and the sub-address);

7) Set subscriber C's phone with the MSN number 6540065 and also set this number
in the MML interface;

8) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and the SETUP message of subscriber C's phone
from the subscriber side to the network side includes the calling number 6540065.
The masking indicator is presentation allowed. Subscriber A's phone displays
6540065 (and the sub-address), MSN number of subscriber C.

2-10
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other the services.
z For the following circumstances, the calling number will not be displayed.
The flag of permanent calling line identification restriction of the calling party is true.
The calling party applies temporary reservation of CLIR service.
The calling party registered CLIR or permanent CLIR by default with true flag.

IV. Calling line identification restriction (CLIR)

With this function, the ISDN number and sub-address of the caller will not be
displayed on the telephone set of the called party.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber A whose number is 6540068 to port 68;

2) Add a DSL subscriber C whose number is 6540064 to port 64;

3) Register subscriber A with the CLIP service at the maintenance console;

4) Register subscriber C with the CLIR service at the maintenance console;

5) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and the SETUP message of subscriber C from the
subscriber side to the network side does not include the calling number, so the switch
cannot restrict the calling number display. The SETUP message from the network
side to the CC side includes the calling number and its presentation is allowed, so
subscriber A's phone displays the calling number;

6) Set subscriber C with the CLIR and the Default CLIR authorities at the
maintenance console;

7) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and the masking indicator in the SETUP message
of subscriber C from the network side to the subscriber side is presentation prohibited.
The calling number information unit in the SETUP message of subscriber A's phone
from the network side to the CC side is presentation prohibited, and the calling
number field is null, so subscriber A's phone does not display the calling number;

8) Set subscriber C with the CLIR and the Permanent CLIR authorities at the
maintenance console, and set bit 5 of the software parameter P51 (CCB Internal
Parameter3) to 0;

9) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and the masking indicator in the SETUP message
of subscriber C from the network side to the CC side is presentation prohibited. The

2-11
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

calling number information unit in the SETUP message of subscriber A's phone from
the network side to the subscriber side is presentation prohibited, and the calling
number field is null, so subscriber A's phone does not display the calling number.

Note:
z This service does not conflict with other supplementary services
z After the registration of CLIR, the caller number can also be displayed by use of the temporary
reservation of Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP).
z The caller number can be displayed if the called party enjoys the CLIR overriding authority though
the caller party has registered CLIR service.
z Currently, there are two ways to provide the CLIR service to DSL subscribers: Set the caller with the
CLIR and Default CLIR authorities at the maintenance console; set the caller with the CLIR and
Permanent CLIR authorities at the maintenance console, and set bit 5 of the software parameter P51
(CCB Internal Parameter3) to 0.
z The CLIR service has a higher priority than the CLIP service.

V. Permanent Booking COLR

With this service, the connection number is not displayed to the caller.

VI. Connected line identification presentation (COLP)

The COLP service provides the caller with the ISDN number (and the sub-addressing
if possible) of the connected subscriber.

The service will be provided upon subscription. Subscribers can apply to the
Telecommunication Office for this service. After registration, this service will be
provided.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber A whose number is 6540068 to port 68;

2) Add a DSL subscriber C whose number is 6540064 to port 64;

3) Register subscriber C with the COLP authority at the maintenance console;

4) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and subscriber A answers the call;

5) The CONNECT message of subscriber C's phone from the network side to the
subscriber side includes the connected line number (and the sub-address).

2-12
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Note:
z If the callee has registered the COLR service and the caller has not the "overriding" authority, the
number of the connected line will not be transferred to the caller.
z You do not need to register the COLP authority at the phone.
z It is required that the caller's phone or the related equipment supports the number presentation
function.
z The caller receives the prompt that the call has been forwarded and the forwarded-to number when
the call is forwarded.

VII. Connected line identification restriction (COLR)

The COLR service enables the ISDN number and sub-addressing of connected
subscriber not to be provided to caller.

This service will be provided upon subscription.

The COLR service provides two subscription modes: permanent subscription and
temporary subscription.
z If the subscriber applies to the Telecommunication Office for permanent
subscription of COLR service, the COLR will be activated for all calls.
z If the subscriber applies to the Telecommunication Office for temporary
subscription of COLR service, a default value (the connected line number
"Display allowed" or "Display restricted") will be designated. If the callee does not
perform any operation when answering calls, the default value will determine
whether to display the called number or not.
When answering a single call, the callee can set either to display or not display
his/her number. In this case, the terminal shall have a special key that restricts the
provision of the called number. Refer to the network access requirements for the
specific methods of setting this key. Before answering calls, press this special key to
restrict the provision of the called number.
z As options, the switching equipment can provide the subscriber with the function
to activate/deactivate the COLR service in the permanent subscription mode.
Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber A whose number is 6540068 to port 68;

2) Add a DSL subscriber C whose number is 6540064 to port 64;

3) Set subscriber A with the COLP authority at the maintenance console;

4) Set subscriber C with the COLR authority at the maintenance console;

2-13
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

5) Set subscriber A with the COLR authority at the maintenance console. Subscriber
C calls subscriber A, and subscriber A answers the call. The CONNECT message of
subscriber A's phone from the subscriber side to the network side does not include
the connected line number, but it does not indicate connected line identification
restriction. Subscriber C's phone displays the connected line number.

6) Set subscriber C with the COLR and the Default COLR authorities at the
maintenance console;

7) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and subscriber A answers the call. The CONNECT
message of subscriber A's phone from the subscriber side to the network side
includes the connected line number, and it indicates connected line identification
restriction. The CONNECT message of subscriber C's phone from the network side to
the subscriber side includes the connected line number, but it indicates connected
line identification restriction. The number field is null and subscriber C's phone does
not display the connected line number;

8) Set subscriber C with the COLR and the Permanent COLR authorities at the
maintenance console, and set bit 6 of the software parameter P51 (CCB Internal
Parameter3) to 0;

9) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and subscriber A answers the call. The CONNECT
message of subscriber A's phone from the subscriber side to the network side
includes the connected line number, and it indicates connected line identification
restriction. The CONNECT message of subscriber C' phone from the network side to
the subscriber side includes the connected line number, but it indicates connected
line identification restriction. The number field is null and subscriber C's phone does
not displays the connected line number.

Note:
z If the callee has registered and activated the COLR service and the caller has invoked the call
waiting service, the called number will not be returned on receipt of the call waiting indication.
z The COIR service has a higher priority than the COIP service. Only in the case that the caller is of
the "overriding" type, can the number of the connected line be transferred to the caller.
z You do not need to register the COLR service at the phone.

VIII. COLR Booking Default

This new service is a kind of supplementary ISDN service used by the calling ISDN
subscribers. The subscriber who has registered this service can limit the display of
the caller number on the callee's telephone.

2-14
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

The subscriber using this service must have the right of COLR booking default and
COLR.

This service can be set by command ADD/MOD DSL.

Note:
z During the application of this service, different contents such as "Private", "P" or else will be
displayed on the called telephones according to different telephone types.
z If the callee has the COLR override service, the caller number will be displayed on the telephone.
z Permanent booking COLR service has a higher priority than this service. If the subscriber has
simultaneously registered these two services, the Permanent booking COLR service will be enabled
first.

IX. COLR Override

If a special subscriber has applied for this service at the telecom office, the
connection number will be displayed to the ISDN caller, no matter whether the callee
has registered any service related to the COLR service. Set this service with the
command MOD/ADD DSL.

The subscribers using this service must have COLP and COLR Override rights, and
the telephone must be a CID telephone.

X. Direct-Dialing-In

With the direct-dialing-in (DDI) service, a subscriber can directly reach another
subscriber in the ISPBX or another private system, without intervention of the
operator. This service is realized based on using the ISDN number without involving
the sub-address.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540138 to port 138 and connect phones
A and B to this port;

2) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540132 to port 132 and connect phone C
to this port;

3) Set port 132 with the DDI service at the maintenance console;

4) If a subscriber dials 6540138 at phone C, both phones A and B respond.

2-15
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Note:
z The DDI service and the MSN service cannot be registered at the same time.
z The DDI service is oriented to the callee, and it does not involve the sub-address of the callee.

XI. Call forwarding unconditional (CFU)

With the CFU service, the network will forward all incoming calls made to the service
subscriber (with ISDN number) to another number, and the call originating service of
the service subscriber will not be affected.

Example

1) Configure multiple subscriber numbers to port 68. Connect subscribers A and B to


this port, their numbers being 6540068 and 6540069 respectively;

2) Set subscriber A with the CFU authority;

3) Subscriber A registers the CFU service by operating on the phone (or dialing the
supplementary service prefix). The forwarded-to number is 6540069, number of
subscriber B;

4) Subscriber C calls subscriber A, and the call is forwarded to subscriber B.

Note:
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for absent subscriber service/call back service/wakeup
service and call forwarding unconditional.
z When the call forwarding service and do-not-disturb service are registered, the do-not-disturb service
takes precedence.
z When the call forwarding unconditional is registered, the subscriber will lose the call waiting function.
z The call forwarding unconditional takes precedence over the call forwarding on busy and call
forwarding no reply.
z When subscriber A calls subscriber B and the call is forwarded to subscriber C, if subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, then he will get the number of subscriber A.
z When subscriber C calls subscriber A and A forwards the call unconditionally to subscriber B, if both
subscribers A and B have applied for the caller identification display service, then only subscriber B
can identify the caller number of subscriber C.

2-16
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

XII. Call forwarding busy (CFB)

When the service subscriber is busy, the CFB service allows the network to forward
all incoming calls to another ISDN number, and the call originating service of the
service subscriber will not be affected.

Example

1) Configure multiple subscriber numbers to port 68. Connect subscribers A and B to


this port, their numbers being 6540068 and 6540069 respectively;

2) Set subscriber A with the CFB authority;

3) Subscriber A registers the CFB service by operating on the phone (or dialing the
supplementary service prefix). The forwarded-to number is 6540070, number of
subscriber C;

4) Both subscribers A and B pick up their phones to occupy the two B channels.
Subscriber D calls subscriber A and the call is forwarded to subscriber C.

Note:
z The CFU service has a higher priority than the CFB service and the CFNR service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for the absent subscriber service/wakeup service and
call forwarding on busy.
z When the call forwarding on busy and do-not-disturb services are registered, the do-not-disturb
service will take precedence.
z When the call forwarding on busy is registered, you will not have the call waiting function.
z When subscriber A calls subscriber B and the call is forwarded to subscriber C, if subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, he will get the number of subscriber A.
z When subscriber C calls subscriber A and A forwards the call on busy to subscriber B, if both
subscribers A and B have applied for the caller identification display service, then only subscriber B
can identify the caller number of subscriber C.

XIII. Call forwarding no reply (CFNR)

If the incoming calls to the service subscriber are not answered, the CFNR service
allows the network to forward these calls to another ISDN number, and the call
originating service of the service subscriber will not be affected.

Example

1) Configure multiple subscriber numbers to port 68. Connect subscribers A and B to


this port, their numbers being 6540068 and 6540069 respectively;

2-17
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2) Set subscriber A with the CFNR authority;

3) Subscriber A registers the CFNR service by operating on the phone (or dialing the
supplementary service prefix). The forwarded-to number is 6540070, number of
subscriber C;

4) Subscriber D calls subscriber A. If subscriber A does not answer the call for so long
a period that it is timed out, the call is forwarded to subscriber C.

Note:
z The CFU service has a higher priority than the CFB service and the CFNR service.
z The subscriber cannot simultaneously apply for the absent subscriber service/call back service/
wake up service and call forwarding no reply.
z When the call forwarding no reply and do-not-disturb services are registered, the do-not-disturb
service takes precedence.
z When the call forwarding no reply applied for, the subscriber will not have the call waiting function.
z The call forwarding unconditional takes precedence over call forwarding no reply.
z When subscriber A calls subscriber B and the call is forwarded to subscriber C, if subscriber C
applies for tracing malicious call, then he will get the number of subscriber A.
z When subscriber C calls subscriber A and A forwards the call on no reply to subscriber B, if both
subscribers A and B have applied for the caller identification display service, then both subscribers A
and B can identify the caller number of subscriber C.

XIV. Call waiting (CW)

When subscriber A is talking with subscriber B, subscriber C tries to establish


connection with subscriber A, at this time, subscriber A will be given a prompt of call
waiting, showing another subscriber is waiting for talking with him. Subscriber A can
accept, reject or ignore the call.

Example
1) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540138 to port 138 and connect
phones A and B to this port;
2) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540132 to port 132 and connect phone
C to this port;
3) When subscribers A and B are on the call, if subscriber C dials 6540138, the
connection will be rejected and there is no message at port 138 from the network
side to the subscriber side, that is, subscribers A and B receive no prompt;
4) Set port 138 with the CW service at the maintenance console;

2-18
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

5) When subscribers A and B are on the call, if subscriber C dials 6540138, the
connection is still rejected and subscribes A and B receive no prompt;
6) Subscriber A dials the supplementary service prefix *58# to activate the CW
service;
7) When subscribers A and B are on the call, subscriber C dials 6540138;
8) The phones of subscribers A and B receive the SETUP message and the
channel indication information unit shows "No Channel";
9) The phones of subscribes A and B respond with the ALERTING message. They
can choose whether to answer the call or switch over from their current call;
10) Disable the CW service at port 138 at the maintenance console. Subscriber A
dials the supplementary service prefixes *58# and #58#, but fails to activate the
CW service.

Note:
z If Subscriber A ignores the call made by Subscriber C, then 20 seconds later, the system will
automatically cut off the call waiting tone of Subscriber A.
z When the call forwarding services (including call forwarding unconditional, call forwarding on no
reply and call forwarding on busy) are registered, you will not have the call waiting function.
z You need to reactivate the CW service after setting the CW service again at the maintenance
console.

XV. Hold

The CH service supports to hold calls and restore calls.

The hold function is used to release a connected B-channel, while the call reference
of this held call will be kept. The restore function is used to connect the held call to a
B-channel.

When the CH service is activated, the conversation over the B-channel will be
interrupted, and the B-channel will be held for later use by the network for the service
subscriber.

This service is valid for both the caller and the callee, who can initiate another call
with the ongoing talk being held. When the subscriber wants to resume the held talk,
he/she should request for it. The successful retrieval operation depends on whether
there is a B-channel held and whether a B-channel is available.

Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for this service. After the
registration, the service will be available.

Example

2-19
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

1) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540138 to port 138 and connect phones
A and B to this port;

2) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540132 to port 132 and connect phones
C and D to this port;

3) When both phones A and C have no HOLD authority, if a subscriber dials 6540138
at phone C and phone A is picked up to answer the call, the subscriber at phone A will
fail to operate on the phone to use the HOLD service.

4) Set the number 6540138 with the HOLD authority at the maintenance console.
When subscribers at phones A and C are talking, the subscriber at phone A will
succeed in operating on the phone to use the HOLD service.

5) Hang up phone A and press the "hold" button on the phone. In such case,
subscribers at phones A and C can restore their talk;

6) Set the number 6540138 with the HOLD authority at the maintenance console.
When subscribers at phones A and C are talking, the subscriber at phone A succeeds
in operating on the phone to use the HOLD service. Then the subscriber at phone A
calls the subscriber at phone D;

7) When subscribers at phones A and D are talking, if the subscriber at phone A uses
the HOLD service, he/she can switch the talk with the subscribers at phones C and
D.

Note: A DSL subscriber does not need to register the HOLD authority at the phone.

XVI. Terminal portability (TP)

At a given access interface, when a call is on its process, the TP service allows to
move a terminal from one port to another, or to move a call from one terminal to
another.

This service is valid for both the caller and the callee. The TP service is only
applicable to the BRI (2B+D).

The TP service provides the following functions for subscribers during call process:
z Uses a compatible terminal to replace another at the same port.
z Transfers a call from one terminal to another terminal connected to the same
basic interface.
z Stops and then resumes calling in the same terminal and at the same port.
z Moves a terminal from one port to another.
This supplementary service is suitable for the user-interfered and interactive
circuit-switched services (for example, telephone), not suitable for non-interactive
services (for example, telex and computer communication).

2-20
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

The C&C08 Switch provides this service to all subscribers.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540068 to port 138. Connect two phones
A and B to this port;

2) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540132 to port 132. Connect two phones
C and D to this port;

3) Set port 138 with the TP authority at the maintenance console;

4) Subscribers at phones A and C are on a call. The subscriber at phone A succeeds


in holding the call by operating on the phone (according to ID 3) during the call;

5) The subscriber at phone B succeeds in restoring the call by operating on the phone
(or after phone A switches to another port) according to ID 3;

6) Subscribers at phones A and C are on a call. The subscriber at phone A succeeds


in holding the call by operating on the phone (according to ID 3) during the call;

7) The subscriber at phone B fails to restore the call by operating on the phone
according to ID 4, but succeeds according to ID 3;

8) Subscribers at phones A and C are on a call. The subscriber at phone A succeeds


in holding the call by operating on the phone (according to ID 3) during the call. Then
hang up phone C, and the subscriber at phone A fails to restore the call by operating
on the phone according to ID 3. The failure cause is 96 (remote release);

9) Subscribers at phones A and C are on a call. The subscriber at phone A succeeds


in holding the call by operating on the phone (according to ID 3) during the call. Then
hang up phone C. If the subscriber at phone A does not operate to restore the call,
the resources and data that the switch reserves for this call will be released and the
CR enters the NULL status. At such time the subscriber at phone A will fail to restore
the call by operating on the phone;

10) Subscribers at phones A and C are on a call. The subscriber at phone A succeeds
in holding the call by operating on the phone (according to ID 3) during the call. Do
not hang up phone C. If the subscriber at phone A does not operate to restore the call
for so long that it is timed out, the call will be released. At such time the subscriber at
phone A will fail to restore the call by operating on the phone.

2-21
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Note:
z The service subscriber of the three-party service is prohibited from activating the TP service.
z The User-to-User Signaling service (UUS) is incompatible with the TP service. That is, the held call
cannot send user-user information between two users.

XVII. Conference

This service is used for the communication among three or more parties.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540138 to port 138 and connect phone A
to this port;

2) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540132 to port 132 and connect phone B
to this port;

3) Prepare two analog phones C and D;

4) Set subscriber A with the CONF authority;

5) During the call between subscribers A and B, subscriber A enters 1 for the
conference party number by operating on the phone. In such case, the system
prompts that the operation is not allowed;

6) Subscriber A then enters 2 for the conference party number by operating on the
phone, and the conference call is made;

7) Subscriber A calls subscriber C, and subscriber A adds the call with subscriber C to
the conference call by operating on the phone;

8) When subscriber C joins the conference call, the conference party number reaches
the preset value. Subscriber A makes a call to subscriber D and intends to add this
call to the conference call. In such case, the call with subscriber D cannot be added to
the conference call;

9) Subscriber A hangs up the phone, and all calls related to this subscriber are
released.

2-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Note:
z The conference call takes precedence over the three party service.
z The CONF service contains the HOLD service, that is, once a subscriber registers the CONF service,
this subscriber has the HOLD authority automatically. However, if a subscriber has the HOLD
authority, this subscriber has no CONF authority automatically.
z The conference initiator can separate an participant, reconnect a separated participant, or release an
participant.
z A conference call must have three or more parties (two participants at least).

XVIII. Three-party service (3PTY)

When the subscriber is talking with another party, if there is a need to add a third party,
the subscriber can dial the third party number without interrupting the conversation to
complete the three party communication or is in conversation with either party.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber with the number 6540138 to port 138 and connect phone A
to this port;

2) Add a DSL subscriber with the number 6540132 to port 132 and connect phone B
to this port;

3) Add a DSL subscriber with the number 6540130 to port 130 and connect phone C
to this port;

4) Set subscriber A with the three-party service authority;

5) Subscriber B calls subscriber A. Subscriber A operates on the phone to enable the


three-party service during the talk;

6) When the call between subscriber B and subscriber A holds, subscriber A calls
subscriber C;

7) If subscriber C hangs up the phone first during the talk with subscriber A, the call
between subscriber A and subscriber B still holds;

8) Subscriber A can delete subscriber C from the three-party service during their talk,
and the call between subscribe A and subscriber B still holds.

2-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Note:
z To establish the three-party service, proceed as follows: Connect a call; Hold the call; Make (or
answer) a new call; Connect the new call to start the three-party talk.
z The three-party service contains the HOLD service, that is, once a subscriber has the three-party
service authority, this subscriber is entitled to the HOLD authority at the same time. However, it is
not true conversely. If a subscriber has the HOLD authority, the subscriber is not entitled to the
three-party authority automatically.
z When applying for the three party service, the subscriber cannot apply for all the services of outgoing
call restrictions at the same time.

XIX. User-to-user signaling service (UUS)

The UUS supplementary service allows an ISDN subscriber to send or receive some
limited information over the signaling B channel between him/her and other ISDN
subscribers. Such information is transmitted transparently over the network.

According to the categories of the services preset by subscribers, the UUS services
provided by the network and relating to circuit switching can be divided into the
following three categories, which supports transmitting information units of 131 bytes
at most.
z UUS 1: During the stages of call establishment and clearing, transmits the
user-user information (UUI) by adding it to the basic call control information.
z UUS 2: During the call establishment stage, transmits the UUI by using the
USER INFORMATION message (independent of the call control message). From
the sender's perspective, the UUI is sent before the call enters the running status
(before the remote subscriber accepts the call).
z UUS3: Transmits the UUI during the call progress stage by using the USER
INFORMATION (independent of the call control message).
Subscribers can apply to the Telecommunication Office for UUS services 1, 2 and 3.

Example
z Preset condition
Both the caller and the callee use ISDN terminals where the UUI can be entered and
displayed.

The UUS service is available to both the caller and the callee, but Service 1 and
Service 2 must be subscribed by caller, and service 3 can be subscribed by caller or
callee.
z Operation
UUS1 (during call establishment):

2-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Caller: Set the UUI at the terminal before the call, and the UUI sent from the caller is
displayed after the callee's phone rings.

Callee: If the UUI is set before the call, the UUI is sent to the caller after the phone
rings. If the UUI is entered when the phone rings, the UUI is sent to the caller after the
callee picks up the phone.

UUS1 (during call clearing):

If the UUI is entered during the call, the information is sent to the other side
immediately after onhook.

UUS2:

Caller:Set the UUS2 request at the terminal and the request is sent after offhook.
Enter the UUI after getting the confirmation from the callee and then send it.
Callee: Respond to the caller. Enter the UUI after confirming that the UUS2 is
activated and then send it.

UUS3 (during call establishment):

Caller: Set the UUS3 request at the terminal before the call. Send the request after
offhook. Enter the UUI during the call after getting confirmation from the callee and
send it.

Callee: The callee terminal responds automatically after receiving the UUS3 request
from the caller. Enter the UUI during the call after confirming that the UUS3 is
activated and send it.

UUS3 (during call progress):


Caller: Set the UUS3 request at the terminal during the talk. Send this request after
offhook. Enter the UUI during the talk after getting confirmation from the callee and
send it.
Callee: The callee terminal responds automatically after receiving the UUS3 request
from the caller. Enter the UUI during the talk after confirming that the UUS3 is
activated and send it.

Well-designed UUS, as a typical service in ISDN, can perform multiple functions. For
example, by using the UUS, you can notify the other party of your number, your name
and other information, and you can leave a short message when the other party is
absent.

2-3
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Note:
z These three services can be used separately or together in one call.
z The UUS1 information needs to be configured at the DSL phone set before the call.
z Service 2 is only applicable to point-to-point configuration.
z When using the UUS Service 3, the service subscriber of the three-party service can send and
receive UUI, while no UUI can be transmitted between the remote subscribers.

XX. Advice of charge (AOC)

The registered subscriber initiates the calling. After each communication, the switch
sends a prompt ring to the telephone set, meanwhile the bill information of this
communication is displayed on the CID display of the telephone set.

AOCS and AOCD are ISDN services but AOCE service is the PSTN service.
z Advice of charge when a call is being set up (AOC-S)
If a subscriber has activated the AOCS service, the network will send the AOCS
information to his telephone after the called hooks off. Related tariff information will be
displayed on his telephone, including tariff of detailed ticket or meter, and metering
mode (a pulse within first n seconds and a pulse every n seconds later). Actual
displayed information depends on telephones.
z Advice of charge during the call process (AOC-D)
If a subscriber has activated the AOCD service, the network will send the AOCD
information to his telephone after a call is established. If the charging method is
detailed ticket, such information will be displayed on the service subscriber's
telephone as current charge, currency, type of the charging information (fixedly
accumulative charging), and bill flag (fixedly normal charging). If the charging method
is meter, such information will be displayed as current number of pulses, type of the
charging information, and bill flag. If the call is free from charge, free flag will be
displayed.

The AOCD information will be sent at call established, TA, TA+TB, TA+2TB... If TA or
TB is smaller than the value of software parameter P143(Minimum AOCD information
interval(second)), The AOCD information is sent at the time interval set by parameter
P143.

When the two AOC services is needed, just apply to the Telecommunication Office.

2-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

Note:
z The charging information sending to the caller is defined by the local office data and depends on the
telephone.
z The service only supports the charging advice of the normal call and can not be used with other
supplementary services.
z The maximum value of the fee supported by the AOCD service is 655.35 yuan. If the value is greater
than the maximum value, the network will send the same value each time (655.35).

XXI. MCID

With this service, if the subscriber receives a malicious call, this subscriber can find
out the number of the telephone set at which the malicious call is originated.

Example

1) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540138 to port 138 and connect phone A
to this port;

2) Add a DSL subscriber whose number is 6540132 to port 132 and connect phone B
to this port;

3) Set the method to enable the MCT service at phone A to hooking in MML interface;

ADD MCTCFG: MCTI=0, MCTM=HOK2;

MOD DSL: D=K'6540138, MCTI=0;

4) Set phone A with the MCT authority in MML interface, and set bit 9 of Oversea
ISDN parameter 1 to 1;

5) Set bit 8 of Oversea CCB_TEST parameter 1 to 1. Then the subscriber at phone B


calls the subscriber at phone A;

6) When the call is connected, the subscriber at phone A operates on the phone to
hold the call;

7) There is event alarm at the alarm console. The alarm includes the calling number,
called number and forwarded-to number;

8) Set bit 8 of Oversea CCB_TEST parameter 1 to 0. Then the subscriber at phone B


calls the subscriber at phone A;

9) When the call is connected, the subscriber at phone A operates on the phone to
hold the call;

2-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

10) The subscriber at phone A dials *33#, and there is even alarm at the alarm
console. The alarm includes the calling number, called number and forwarded-to
number;

11) The ISDN subscriber hears the voice announcement, prompting the maliciously
calling number;

12) Hang up phone A and press the "hold" button on the phone. In such case,
subscribers at phones A and B restore their talk.

Note:
z When either the do-not-disturb or the absent service is registered, the subscriber cannot operate to
use the MCT service.
z When the MCT service is registered, even if the caller does not provide the caller's number, the PTT
can still find out the number of the subscriber who has made the malicious call.
z A subscriber can trace the malicious call during the talk or after it.
z The ISDN subscriber does not support the "offhook" mode (ADD MCTCFG) to enable the MCT
service.

XXII. B Channel Reserved

This service is one of ISDN supplementary services. If a subscriber has this service
authority, the B channel will not be released when the call is held during
supplementary services such as the call hold or conference call service.

Only ISDN subscribers can use this service. Moreover, to use this service, a
subscriber needs to have the B channel authority.

To use it, a subscriber needs only to set this service authority by the command
ADD/MOD DSL.

In addition to the above services, C&C08 Switch provides the ISDN subscribers with
the supplementary services set by command ADD/MOD DSL. Please refer to PSTN
services part to view the meaning and operation of the service.

Note:
The detailed operation procedures may vary due to the use of ISDN phone set. Refer to the phone set
user manual for operation.

2-3
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 EV Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 ISDN Services

2.5 Centrex Services

ISDN subscribers can form Centrex groups. The ISDN Centrex subscribers can enjoy
the ISDN basic services, ISDN bearer services, ISDN supplementary services,
Centrex basic services and Centrex supplementary services. The operations of the
first three kinds of services are the same as those of ISDN ordinary subscribers. And
the concepts and operations of the Centrex basic services and supplementary
services are the same as those described in the "Centrex Services" chapter of this
manual. The following two points should be noted.
z Displaying just the short number of the intra-group caller number
In the case that both the caller and the called ISDN subscriber are in the same
Centrex group and the callee has registered the CLIP service, the displayed number
will be the short number/extension number of the caller no matter whether the caller
directly dials the short number or first dials the out-group prefix then the long number
of the callee.
z Displaying just the short number of the intra-group connected line
After the callee hooks off, the number displayed on the caller's phone is the short
number of the connected line. In the case that both the callee and the calling ISDN
subscriber are in the same Centrex group and the caller has registered the COLP
service, the displayed number will be the short number/extension number of the
connected line no matter whether the caller directly dials the short number or first
dials the out-group prefix then the long number of the callee.

2-4
HUAWEI

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System


Operation Manual – Supplementary Services
Volume

Appendix
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Appendix A Other Services ..........................................................................................................A-1


A.1 Authentication Service.......................................................................................................A-1
A.2 Call Forward of Hunting Group Service ............................................................................A-2
A.3 Call Forwarding Restriction ...............................................................................................A-3
A.4 Making, Modifying and Removing Tones and Announcements on Line ...........................A-4
A.5 Number Change Prompt ...................................................................................................A-7
A.6 Number Portability (NP) ....................................................................................................A-9
A.7 Operator Override DDS...................................................................................................A-10
A.8 Preselection Service........................................................................................................A-11
A.9 Priority Subscriber ...........................................................................................................A-12
A.10 Single Call Multi-Display Service...................................................................................A-13
A.11 Toll Call Indication Service ............................................................................................A-14
A.12 Week-based Multiple Wake up......................................................................................A-16

Appendix B Relationship between Different Services...............................................................B-1

Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................................................C-1

i
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

Appendix A Other Services

This section introduces the feature services of the C&C08 switch. A subscriber can
use these services only after the related data is configured. The service authority is
not concerned.

A.1 Authentication Service

I. Meaning

Authentication service mentioned here is only for authenticating incoming trunk caller
by means of number length authentication, call barring or caller attribute modification
in the unit of trunk group. Different authentication modes can be adopted based on
different caller categories, and different authentication modes can also be set for
different caller numbers and address attributes. This service is used in tandem office
to meet the requirement of large-capacity trunk authentication. In case of configuring
authentication data on Internet Service Process board (ISP), a maximum of 500,000
pieces of data can be configured.

II. Setting conditions

In order to implement trunk authentication, the outgoing trunk side of the opposite
office is required to send caller number automatically. If the outgoing trunk does not
do so, the incoming trunk should be set to request outgoing trunk for the caller
number; otherwise, authentication cannot be done normally.

III. Operation

The operator uses ADD CLRDSG to set authentication modes for different callers,
and uses ADD TGDSG to specify the corresponding authentication group numbers
for various incoming caller categories.

IV. Example

z Add caller authentication function for ISP:


ADD ISPFUNC: FCF=CLRDSP, BG=3;
z Set to use incoming trunk group 10, and the length of caller number ranging from
7 to 10. The calls out of the length range will be rejected.
Step one: add a discrimination mode for a discrimination group number - number
length discrimination

A-1
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

ADD CLRDSG: DSP=10, CLI=K'654, DAI=UDN, FUNC=DSG, MIN=7, MAX=10;

Step two: set a discrimination group number for the trunk group

ADD TGDSG: TG=10, CCAT=254, DSG=10;

Note:
z The field "CALLER CATEGORY" in ADD TGDSG supports the wildcard character 254. When 254 is
entered, all caller categories will be matched.
z The fields "REQUEST CALLER NUMBER" and "CAN REQUEST CALLER NUMBER" must be set to
"TRUE" first before setting of discrimination group number for trunk group by using ADD TGDSG, so
as to further ensure that the opposite office will send the caller number; otherwise, caller
authentication cannot be carried out.
z Due to the limit of table capacity of the host program and data setting mode, wildcard character field
will not be supported if discrimination data ADD CLRDSG is not set on ISP, while if the data is set on
ISP, both discrimination group number and caller number support wildcard character field.
Discrimination group number supports wildcard character discrimination group 65534, and caller
number supports 16-e wildcard character (eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee).
z The function codes of the discrimination group are described as follows:
a) REJECT CALL: reject incoming calls directly.
b) CALLER NUMBER DISCRIMINATION: number length discrimination; restrict the length of caller
number of the opposite office. If the caller number length exceeds the specified range, the call will be
rejected.
c) Modify caller attribute: modify some attributes of the caller without affecting incoming calls. The caller
attributes that can be modified are: call source code, billing source code, subscriber call barring group
number, caller category and caller number change of the incoming trunk implemented through caller
number change index.
d) Caller number discrimination and modify caller attribute: b) combination with c).

A.2 Call Forward of Hunting Group Service

Call Forward Unconditional of a Hunting group (CFUH) is a terminating feature. When


this feature is activated, all incoming calls to the pilot number of the hunting group will
immediately be transferred to another telephone pre-defined by the subscriber.

Call Forward Busy of a Hunting group (CFBH) is a terminating feature. When this
feature is activated, all incoming calls to the pilot number of the hunting group will be
forwarded to another telephone pre-defined by the subscriber if all lines within that
hunting group are busy.

A-2
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

This service is only for PBX indicating subscriber and the national code must be Hong
Kong.

These features are applicable to all hunting features including the Sequential Hunting
and Circular Hunting.

The subscriber can activate/deactivate the CFUH feature of a hunting group by


dialing the access code *55/#55 at the pilot telephone.

The subscriber can activate/deactivate the CFBH feature of a hunting group by dialing
the access code *57/#57 at the pilot telephone.

A.3 Call Forwarding Restriction

I. Meaning

This service is for operator only. It can restrict subscribers from the designated call
source to register or use CF service. For the subscribers who want to register CF on
phone set, they will be prohibited for registering forward-to numbers; for the
subscribers having registered with CF, they cannot use CF service. This service is
applicable to CFU, CFB and CFNR.

II. Setting conditions

Null.

III. Operation

The operator uses command ADD CFR to add CF restriction data.

IV. Example

Suppose the operator wants to restrict the subscribers from call source 0 for
forwarding calls to the numbers started with 654, he/she should use the command:

ADD CFR: CSC=0, RT=CFU, RN=K'654;

When a subscriber from call source 0 registers a forward-to number started with 654
for CFU, he/she will hear the busy tone, and the registration of CF fails. If a
subscriber from call source 0 has registered CF to a number started with 654, CF
cannot be used when there is an incoming call.

A-3
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

Note:
z If a Centrex subscriber registers a short number for CF, the long number corresponding to this short
number will be restricted for CF; if this subscriber registers an out-group number for CF, this number
without outgoing prefix will be restricted for CF.
z All the numbers started with this restricted called number will be restricted. Note that this number can
be a prefix or not.

A.4 Making, Modifying and Removing Tones and


Announcements on Line

I. Meaning

The tone mentioned above refers to the tone from the Signal Tone Board (SIG) that
frequently played, such as dialing tone and busy tone.

II. Setting conditions

Null.

III. Operation

ADD/MOD SIGSET: setting and modifying the tone playing mode of the SIG tone.

ADD/MOD SIGSLOT: resetting and modifying the tone playing channel used by the
SIG tone by default.

Note:
Because modification and setting of SIG tone will make a big impact on other aspects, please be sure to
read the description in the following Note carefully before modification.

IV. Example

z Set the tone file played by No. 10 tone on the SIG of the SM to FFFFF802, and
the mode is the basic playing mode:
ADD SIGSET: IDX=10, SC1="FFFFF802", METHOD=SM, SSTSM=BAS;

A-4
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

z Set the tone file played by No. 10 tone on the Special Tone Board (SPD) of the
SPM to FFFFF840 and the mode is the synchronous playing mode:
MOD SIGSET: IDX=10, SC1="FFFFF840", METHOD=SPM, SSTSPM=SYN;
z Modification of SIGSET and SIGSLOT can change some timeslots for tone
playing. For example, to set Timeslot 10 to send the dialing tone:
Step one: modify No. 10 tone of the SIGSET to the dialing tone (FFFFF803 is a
dialing tone):

MOD SIGSET: IDX=10, SC1="FFFFF803", METHOD=SM, SSTSM=BAS;

Step two: use ADD SIGSLOT to map dialing tone to the timeslot corresponding
to the SIG (the SIG uses HW 48 and HW 71):

ADD SIGSLOT: MN=10, ST=ST3, HW=48, SN=10;

A-5
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

Note:
z The SIG only has 2 HWs for playing various tones, while the SPD has 8 HWs and it can use 4 HWs
(totally 128 channels) to play asynchronous tone. This difference also leads to the different
parameter settings between the SIG and the SPD.
z Three SIG/SPD tone playing modes, which can be set by ADD/MOD SIGSET, are described as
follows:
a) BAS --- (BASIC SIGNAL) basic tone playing mode. By adopting this mode, the tone occupies a fixed
timeslot for cyclic playing, and only if the subscriber timeslot is connected to this timeslot, tones can be
heard. This mode is generally applicable to important and frequently-used tones, such as dialing tone,
busy tone.
b) SYN --- (SYNCHRONOUS) synchronous tone playing mode. By adopting this mode, it is necessary to
dynamically apply for channels for tone playing, thus a separate timeslot can be provided to each
subscriber for tone playing to avoid affecting each other. This tone playing mode is applicable to MCID
service.
c) ASYN --- (ASYNCHRONOUS) asynchronous tone playing mode. It is also necessary to dynamically
apply for channel for tone playing, but it is unnecessary to occupy multiple timeslots in case of hearing
this tone by multiple subscribers simultaneously, instead, all the subscribers are connected to the same
timeslot. Therefore, HW resource on the SIG can be saved (the timeslot can be released for other
services when no subscriber hears the tone). This tone playing mode is applicable to 117 and most of
tones with fixed content.
z One signal tone setting command can set a maximum of three SIG tone files, but generally one SIG
tone only uses one file.
z Currently, more than 90 tones have been used by various services, however, one SIG of the SM can
only use two HWs (totally 64 timeslots), so "BAS" cannot be configured to all services.
z When set by ADD SIGSET, the Service Processing Module (SPM) does not use ASYNCHRONOUS
mode, for SPD can provide 128 tone channels, thus, it is unnecessary to adopt SM processing mode
due to no resource limit.
z Be cautious in using ADD SIGSLOT and ADD SIGSET, because the modification will affect all
subscribers. In normal case, there is the default SIGSET configuration data. It is better not to modify
SIG tone setting if unnecessary.
z In order to ensure the normal playing of some frequently-used tones, they can only be configured in
"BAS" mode, and no modification is allowed. The signal tones are 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 23, 29, 51, 54, 60, 61
and 62.

A-6
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

A.5 Number Change Prompt

I. Meaning

If a subscriber number has been changed, when other subscribers call the subscriber,
a prompt for number change will be played to the caller, even the new number will be
informed if necessary.

II. Setting conditions

Subscriber A's number has been changed. When there is an incoming call from other
subscriber, it is only necessary to give a prompt that the number has been changed.
Use command MOD ST for the setting.

Subscriber A's number has been changed. When there is an incoming call from other
subscriber, both the number change information and the new number should be
prompted: use command MOD ST to set the state of Subscriber A to number changed
state; use command ADD CHGDN to set Subscriber A's new number; use command
ADD CFPRO to configure data for failure processing (number change announcement
is played); in addition, use command ADD SIGSET to set the tone in No. 90 channel
to synchronous tone.

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Ordinary subscriber who has changed the number

B Ordinary subscriber
z Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A Subscriber B hears the prompt tone

Set a new number for Subscriber A, set failure processing for number change, and
set No. 90 tone to synchronous tone.
z Service operation
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hears the prompt tone for the number change
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A
and the new number

A-7
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

IV. Example

Suppose:

Subscriber A (77700001) to number change state: MOD ST: D=K'7770001,


DNS=CHG;

Ordinary Subscriber B (77700000)


z Ordinary number change announcement
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A Subscriber B hears the prompt tone for number change

Set the new number of Subscriber A to 6540001: ADD CHGDN: ODN=K'7770001,


NDN=K'6540001;

Set failure processing data for number change: ADD CFPRO: PFX=K'777, FCC=DNC,
FSC=255, RUT=ALL, CSA=ALLSRVC, FPT=SIG, TT=ST36;

Set signal tone 90 to synchronous tone:

State of SM: MOD SIGSET: IDX=90, METHOD=SM, SSTSM=SYN;

State of SPM: MOD SIGSET: IDX=90, METHOD=SPM, SSTSPM=SYN;


z Number change announcement reporting new number
Operation Expected result
Subscriber B hears the prompt tone for number change, for
Subscriber B calls Subscriber A example, "The number you dialed has been changed. The
new number is 6540001"

Note:
z Signal tone 36 is the ordinary number change announcement. Signal tone 90 is the number change
announcement reporting new number. Separate tone recording is necessary.
z For the SM, the CB02SIG board is required. Therefore, when multiple subscribers activate this
service simultaneously, only one subscriber can hear the announcement reporting new number due
to resource limit.

A-8
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

A.6 Number Portability (NP)

This service is also called "Telephone Moved without Number Changed" service, a
type of intelligent service. That is, the subscriber can keep his/her phone number
unchanged when moving to another place, thus a permanent personal number can be
provided to the subscriber. The service is implemented through the data processing
by a platform in a local network.

Suppose a subscriber, whose number "a" is in Office A, moves to Office B, and Office
B allocates a number "b" to the subscriber. NP service can be achieved in the
following way: If another subscriber dials the number "a", after the originating or
tandem office receives the number "a", it will find that the number should be
processed with NP analysis. The analysis result shows that the subscriber is a NP
subscriber (originally in Office A, now in Office B). With the new number "b" obtained,
the call can be put through.

The number "a" is callee Directory Number (DN), which will not be changed even if
the subscriber moves to another place. Therefore, it is a permanent number for the
subscriber. The number "b" is callee Network Number (NN), which is the subscriber's
network number to be transferred between switches.

For example, Subscriber A lived in District A and his/her phone number was 6543210
originally. Now, Subscriber A lives in District B and the new number is 2345678.
Subscriber A has applied for a NP number 7777777. In this way, wherever he/she
moves, any district or any city, other subscribers can call him/her by dialing 7777777.

The following text gives the data configuration procedures.


z Hardware configuration
Configure a Central Database Processing Board (CDP) and the CDP function NP1 or
NP2.

Use the command ADD NPSET to set the attributes of the server connected with the
specified CDP. It should be noted that the port number must be 5352.
z Subscriber data configuration
Modify the NP query flag of Subscriber A's call source to YES.

Use the command MOD NPATTR to modify the NP attribute of the module where
Subscriber A is located, that is, to modify the number of the CDP module to be
queried. The module number here refers to the function module number of the CDP,
which is the difference between 211 and the board group number of the CDP.

Modify the start NP query position of the prefix 7777 to 7, so as to ensure that NP
analysis is performed only after 7 digits are received if the prefix is 7777.
z Server setting

A-9
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

Execute the Structured Query Language (SQL) script, connect the NP server and run
the program NPserver.exe.

Add a record ('7777777', '6543210') in the HKNP table. When Subscriber A's phone
number is changed to 2345678, it is only necessary to modify the data in the data
table.

A.7 Operator Override DDS

I. Meaning

By setting the software parameter, this service controls whether the operator (as the
caller) can override Do-not-Disturb Service if the callee registers DDS.

II. Setting conditions

This service requires no authority, and it is only necessary to modify the user type to
operator (by command ADD ST or MOD ST).

III. Operation

The operator calls a subscriber registered with DDS. Use software parameter to
control whether to allow the operator to call in.

Note:
The software parameter used: (OVS_CCB_PARA3)
BIT4: corresponding to software parameter IF_ALW_EXCEL_DONOTDISTURB
(OVS_CCB_PARA3_BIT4)
Used to control whether operator is allowed to override DDS;
1: override allowed (by default)
0: override not allowed

IV. Example

Refer to operation.

A-10
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

A.8 Preselection Service

I. Meaning

Preselection service can perform special processing of a call according to the


specified caller number, called prefix and current time. It has four functions currently,
namely call rejection, preselection, caller attribute modification, and preselection &
caller attribute modification. Call rejection function is for releasing a call directly;
preselection is for inserting an access code before the existing called number; caller
attribute modification is for modifying the caller routing source code, failure source
code, caller billing source code, caller call barring group number of the call, as well as
caller number and called number; preselection & caller attribute modification is an
integration of the above two functions. This service, providing multiple functions with
flexible usage, can meet various service requirements related to number change,
routing, call barring and billing during a call.

II. Setting conditions

The switch must be configured with ISP board.

III. Operation

The operator can use the command ADD CNACLR to add the data for a single
subscriber, and the command ADB CNACLR to add the data for a batch of
subscribers.

IV. Example

If it is required to insert an access code prefix 191 before the called number for
routing and to modify the billing source code to 1 when a subscriber whose number
starts with 666 calls a prefix 010 on 25th, December, the data setting procedures are
as follows:

First define the time index, for example, define the time index for 25th, Dec. to 1.

ADD TMIDX: TMX=1, TYPE=CLRA, IDXT=MIDX, MONTH=DEC, DAY=25,


HOUR=24;

In order to insert an access code before the called number, it is necessary to add
preselection access code first, and then specify an access code corresponding to the
access code index:

ADD PRECODE: IDX=1, ACD=K'191, CN="China Tele";

Finally add Preselection data:

A-11
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

ADD CNACLR: PFX=K'010, CID=K'666, TMIDX=0, FUNC=PAM, RCHS=1, PACC=1,


RANA=YES;

Note:
z Time index setting includes date setting and weekday setting. Time index can be precise to one hour.
For table searching, the system can match the time index value corresponding to the minimum time
point that is later than the current system time. If a time index for a certain time can be found
according to the weekday, but another index can be found according to the date, the latter one
should be taken as reference.
z There are 7 default time indices during system initialization: 24:00:00 from Sunday to Saturday. It is
recommended not to delete these indices, in case that the corresponding time indices cannot be
found for some time points. When the time index for a certain time point cannot be found, the system
will use the default value 0. Therefore, index 0 should be taken as the default value as possible
during preselection data setting.
z If the function of preselection & modify caller attribute is selected, both called number change and
preselection can be accomplished. In case of inserting an access code before the called number, the
called number should be converted first. If the caller number is converted, the original caller number
should be used for querying the corresponding caller number analysis data.
z When the query of preselection data by the system fails or times out, BIT4 of the overseas CCB
testing parameter 1 will determine whether to release this call: if it is 1, the call will not be released; if
it is 0, the call will be released.
z Reanalysis means that the system reanalyzes the new called number (generally being converted),
then the services related to the original called prefix will be redone based on the new called prefix,
such as routing, billing selection, prefix service attribute, supplementary signaling analysis,
preselection, special processing of called number initials, etc. Therefore, you should be cautious for
whether to select this flag. If preselection is to be done, reanalysis flag should be selected after the
access code is inserted before the called number; while the flag is unnecessary to be selected in
case of modifying caller attribute.

A.9 Priority Subscriber

I. Meaning

If a priority subscriber is in one of the 32-channel frames, the reserved timeslots for
this subscriber can be used to ensure the connection when the traffic is heavy.

II. Setting conditions

Null.

A-12
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

III. Operation

The operator uses the command MOD ST to modify subscriber type to priority
subscriber.

IV. Example

Use the command MOD ST to modify subscriber type to priority subscriber.

A.10 Single Call Multi-Display Service

I. Meaning

The phone sets with multi-display function can ring simultaneously when receiving a
call. If one subscriber picks up the phone, the other phone sets will stop ringing. The
calls are kept secret with Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) function.

II. Setting condition

When setting Private Branch Exchange (PBX) group, the parameter "single call
multi-display" must be set to "TRUE".

III. Operation

Suppose:

A Ordinary subscriber whose number is PQRABCD

B, C, D Ordinary subscribers within the same PBX group as Subscriber A

E Caller
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service application
Operation Expected result
Subscriber E hooks off Subscriber E hears the dialing tone
Subscribers A, B, C and D ring simultaneously, and
Subscriber E dials PQRABCD
Subscriber E hears the ring back tone
The one hooking off is in conversation with Subscriber E.
Subscriber A or B or C or D hooks off
The other phones stop ringing.

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

A-13
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

IV. Example

Suppose Subscriber A’s number is 8883850, Subscribers B, C and D are in the same
multi-display group as Subscriber A, the operation process is as follows:
1) Service registration
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.
2) Service application
Operation Expected result
Subscriber E hooks off Subscriber E hears the dialing tone
Subscribers A, B, C and D ring simultaneously, and
Subscriber E dials 8883850
Subscriber E hears the ring back tone.
The one hooking off is in conversation with Subscriber E.
Subscriber A or B or C or D hook off
The other phones stop ringing.

3) Service cancellation
Apply to the Telecommunication Office for it.

Note:
z When a subscriber or a group of subscribers are busy, the incoming call will be held for a period of
time. Untill one of them is idle, he/she receives the call.
z When the multi-display subscribers turn from busy to idle, the other subscribers within the group ring
simultaneously.

A.11 Toll Call Indication Service

I. Meaning

With the toll call indication service, toll offices or transit offices can inform end-office
subscribers of incoming toll calls. It is toll offices that send voice announcements.

When a toll switch or transit switch detects that the called party of a toll call is busy,
the switch will create a virtual remote operator through failure processing and send a
three-party voice announcement to the called party, like "xxxxx (the number of the
intruded B or C), you have a toll call. To answer it, please hang up. The caller number
is xxxxx (A number)". After the called party hooks on, the switch will ring it again.
Then, the called party can hook off to talk to A. Thus, the toll call indication service is
achieved.

A-14
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

II. Data configuration

The following gives an example. In practice, select appropriate values according to


actual situations.

Operators can add failure processing data to achieve the toll call indication service for
the case that the called parties of the calls through a toll office are busy.

ADD CFPRO: PFX=K'010, FCC=BUSY, FSC=0, RUT=ALL, CSA=ALLSRVC, FPT=


TOLL;

The command means that the switch will offer the toll call indication service for the
unsuccessful calls to the "010" prefix whose failure reason is "Called busy".

III. Related software parameters

Bit 13 of the Call Testing Parameter 3 (P55) controls whether the office offers the toll
call indication service.

=1: Not offer (default value)

=0: Offer

Bit 15 of the Call Testing Parameter 3 (P55) controls whether the first ACM message
to the preceding office contains the failure cause value when the toll call indication
service is available.

=1: Contain the failure cause value (default value)

=0: No failure cause value

Bit 14 of the Oversea CCB Parameter 3 (P88) controls whether to use the failure
source code of the calling party or that of the called party for failure processing.

=1: Use the failure source code of the called party (default value)

=0: Use the failure source code of the calling party

Bit 0 of the ISUP Test Parameter 1 (P28) controls whether the office can offer the toll
call indication service when it is not a toll office but the opposite office is a toll office.

=1: Can offer the service (default value)

=0: Cannot offer the service

A-15
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

Note:
z If a toll office offers the toll call indication service, all calls across the toll office will enjoy the service.
z The service is not restricted by the supplementary service authority. That is, if an office offers the
service, all data-affected subscribers will automatically have the authority to use the service. It
should be noted that the subscribers belong to other switches.
z The service entails the support of standards and signaling systems. Therefore, it is not available in
all countries.

A.12 Week-based Multiple Wake up

I. Meaning

This multiple wake-up service falls into four modes: Monday through Sunday
(everyday), Monday through Saturday, Monday through Friday and Saturday through
Sunday.

A subscriber can register, verify and cancel this service by dialing in or by MML
interface. For example, a subscriber with this authority can dial "*75*0805*18#" to
register this service. In the eight weeks after the registration, the subscriber will enjoy
this service, being waken up at 8:05 a.m. Monday through Saturday (resume dial "1"
for selecting this mode).

This service is available to ST, V5ST, DSL and V5DSL subscribers of touch-tone
dialing at the local exchange.

Notice that the console subscriber can not use this service.

By default, the new service prefix for registering week-based multiple wake-up service
is '*75*'. The prefix is also user-definable, but cannot be one already defined. Use the
following command to define a prefix.

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'*75*, CSTP=NEW, CSA=DAWMMW, MINL=4, MAXL=24,


CHSC=65535;

II. Registering

z By dialing in
Hook off and dial the number in the format "*75*HHMM*XY#". If the operation is
successful, the prompt of registration success will be heard; otherwise, the failure
prompt will be heard.

A-16
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

Explanations for the format "*75*HHMM*XY#":

*75*: The service prefix for the registration (modifiable).

HH: The hours of the waking up (00-23).

MM: The minutes of the waking up (00-59).

X: The waking-up mode (determined by the P76).

X=1: Every day.

X=2: Monday through Saturday.

X=2: Monday through Friday.

X=4: Saturday through Sunday.

Y: The number of weeks registered for the service.

Y=0 No limitation for the number.

Y= (1-9): The number of weeks for the service.


z By MML
Use the command REG NSV to register this service. Select "wakeup" for the
parameter "supplementary service" in the command. A subscriber can register a
maximum of three wake-up records.

For example: To register multiple wake-up service for subscriber 44556677, waking
up at 8:00 a.m. Monday through Friday for two weeks, use the following command.

REG NSV: D=K'44556677, NST=WAKE, WCRT=1, WCFLG0=YES, MWWM0=M3,


WCDTN0=2, WCH0=08, WCM0=00;

Note:
z If a record the subscriber intends to register has been registered (the time of the record is the same
with an existing one or the time interval between them is less than 15 minutes), the registration will
fail.
z Only PB (Push Button) subscribers can apply for this service, while DP (Dial Pulse) subscribers
cannot.
z A subscriber can register at most three wake-up records of day-based and week-based wake-up
services in total.

A-17
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

III. Verification

z By dialing in
Hook off and dial the number in the format "*#75*HHMM#" to query the registration
records. If the operation is successful, the prompt of verification success will be heard.
Otherwise, the failure prompt will be heard.

*75*: The service prefix for the verification (modifiable).

HH: The hours of the waking up (00-23).

MM: The minutes of the waking up (00-59).


z By MML
Use the command DSP NSV to query the registration records of the service.

For example: Query wake-up service records of subscriber 44556677, including


week-based and day-based ones.

DSP NSV: D=K'44556677, NS=WAKE;

IV. Usage

If a subscriber with the wake-up service authority has registered the service, the
switch sends rings to the subscriber at the specified time. If the subscriber hooks off
during the ring, the switch will send the wake-up announcement "Hello, it is time for
you to wake up", and the service ends at that time. If the subscriber does not hook off
during the ring (for one minute), the system will stop the ring and send it again six
minutes later. If the subscriber hooks off during this second ring, the system will send
the wake-up announcement; otherwise, the switch will send the ring again. If the
subscriber hooks off during this third ring, the system will also send the wake-up
announcement; otherwise, the service ends.

V. Cancellation

z By dialing in
Hook off and dial the number in the format "#75*HHMM#" or "#75#", the wake-up
service records can be deleted. If the operation is successful, the prompt of
cancellation success can be heard. Otherwise, the failure prompt will be heard.

#75*: The service prefix for deleting one wake-up service record according to the
inputting time (modifiable).

HH: The hours of the waking up (00-23).

MM: The minutes of the waking up (00-59).

A-18
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

#75#: The service prefix for deleting all wake-up service records according to the
inputting time (modifiable).
z By MML
Use the command RMV NSV to remove the registered multiple wake-up service
records.

By MML, it means that the record will be deleted only if the time meets the conditions
when canceling wake-up services, regardless of the service mode. If no time is input,
all records will be deleted.

For example:

RMV NSV: D=K'44556677, NST=WAKE, CHOUR0=12, CMINUTE0=30;

Note:
With '#75#', only records of a certain mode are deleted, while those of others will not be affected.

VI. Related software parameters

z The P76 controls the corresponding dialing numbers for the four modes of
wake-up service (the values of every four bits must be different and should all be
smaller than nine; otherwise, the setting is invalid and the service will be defined
as the mode "Monday through Sunday").
Explanations for every four bits:

Bit 0-Bit 3: The dialed number for the mode "Saturday through Sunday" (4 by default).

Bit 4-Bit 7: The dialed number for the mode "Monday through Friday" (3 by default).

Bit 8-Bit 11: The dialed number for the mode "Monday through Saturday" (2 by
default).

Bit 12-Bit 15: The dialed number for the mode "Monday through Sunday" (1 by
default).

For example, when the P76 takes the default value of 0x1234, by dialing
"*75*1010*23#", the subscriber registers the wake-up service at 10:10 a.m. Monday
through Saturday for three consecutive weeks.
z COLUMBIA_WAKEUP_TIME_MODE (bit 0 of the P85) controls whether the time
selected for the service registration, cancellation and verification is a multiple of
five.
=0: Yes.

A-19
Operation Manual - Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Other Services

=1: No (By default).


z COLUMBIA_WAKEUP_DEL_MODE (bit 14 of the P92) controls whether to
adopt the Columbia wake-up remove mode or the original wake-up remove
mode.
=0: Adopt the Columbia remove mode, removing the record by time and mode.

=1: Adopt the original remove mode, removing the record by time (By default).
z COLUMBIA_WAKEUP_TONE_MODE (bit 15 of the P92) controls whether to
adopt the Columbia tone mode or others.
=0: Adopt the Columbia tone mode (The corresponding voice files must be loaded).

=1: Adopt the original tone mode (By default).

VII. Related voice files

The relationships between the newly-added voice contents, voice IDs and voice files
are shown as follows. To use the following voice IDs, ensure they have not been used
and set bit 15 of the P91 to 1.
z Voice ID "TID_SERVICE_NOT_PROVIDED_TONE" = 46
The corresponding voice file "0XFFFFF82E.001".

The corresponding voice contents "The times you registered the service has exceed
the maximum allowed" (or other words of this meaning).
z Voice ID "TID_NEW_SERVICE_REGISTER_FAIL_TONE" = 69
The corresponding voice file "0XFFFFF845.001".

The corresponding voice contents "The time or the time format you entered is illegal,
please check it and dial again" (or other words of this meaning).
z Voice ID "TID_NEW_SERVICE_VERIFY_FAIL_TONE" = 70
The corresponding voice file "0XFFFFF846.001".

The corresponding voice contents "The record you entered just now already exists"
(or other words of this meaning).

A-20
Operation Manual – Supplementary Services Volume Appendix B Relationship between Different
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Services

Appendix B Relationship between Different


Services

A COL SU CF CF CF CO 3P UU
CLIP CLIR COLP CW CH TP
B R B B NR U NF TY S

MSN C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CLIP C C C C C C C C C C C C C
CLIR C C C C C C C C C C C C
COLP C C C C C C C C C C C
COLR C C C C C C C C C C
SUB C C C C C C C C C
CFB C H L C C C C C
CFNR H C C C C C C
CFU L C C C C C
CW C C C C C
CH I C C C
TP I I L
CONF I C
3PTY C
Note:
The relationship refers to that between the different services registered on the same terminal.
C -- indicating service A is compatible with service B (Compatible), and they can coexist without conflicts.
I -- indicating service A is inconsistent with service B (Inconsistency), and they cannot be used simultaneously.
H -- indicating service A has higher priority than service B. If A and B are registered simultaneously, A will stand out.
L -- indicating service A has lower priority than service B. If A and B are registered simultaneously, B will stand out.

B-1
Operation Manual – Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
ACD Automatic Call Distribution
AM Administration Module
ANSI American National Standard Institute
AOC Advice of Charge
AOC-E Advice Of Charge at the End of a call
ASL Analog Subscriber Line Board
ASYN Asynchronous
B
BAM Back Administration Module
BID Board Inward Dialing
BRA Basic Rate Adaptation
BRI Basic Rate Interface
C
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CCB Central Control dataBase
International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative
CCITT
Committee
CCS7 Common Channel Signaling no.7
CCW Cancel Call Waiting
CDB Central DataBase
CDP Central Database Processing board
CF Call Forwarding services
CFB Call Forwarding Busy
CFBH Call Forward Busy of Hunting group service
CFNR Call Forwarding No Reply
CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional
CFUH Call Forward Unconditional of Hunting group service
CH Call Hold
CID Caller Identification Display

C-1
Operation Manual – Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations

CLI Calling Line Identification


CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
CM Communication Module
CNAM Caller Name Display
COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction
CONF Conference Calling
CPE Customer Premises Equipment
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CW Call Waiting
D
DDI Direct Dial In
DDN Digital Data Network
DDS Do-not-Disturb Service
DEL µ Law Analog Subscriber Line Board
DID Direct Inward Dialing
DIN Decode Interface Board
DOD1 Direct Outward Dialing-1
DOD2 Direct Outward Dialing-2
DP Detection Point
DR Duplex Ringing
DSL Digital Subscriber Line board
DSP Digital Signal Process
DSS1 Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board
E
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
FR Frame Relay
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
G

C-2
Operation Manual – Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations

GUI Graphic User Interface


H
HW Highway
I
IAM Initial Address Message
ID Identification
IDN Integrated Digital telephone Network
IDT Internal Digital Trunk
IN Intelligent Network
IP Internet Protocol
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISP Internet Service Provider
ISPBX ISDN PBX
ISUP ISDN User Part
ITU International Telecommunications Union
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
ITU-T
Standardization Sector

L
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light Emitting Diode
M
MCID Malicious Call Identification
MML Man Machine Language
MPU Main Processor Unit Board
MSN Multiple Subscriber Number
MWI Message Waiting Indicator
MWN Message Waiting Notification
N
NI Network Interface
N-ISDN Narrow-band ISDN
NN Network Number
NOD Node Communication Board
NP Number Portability

C-3
Operation Manual – Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations

O
OPT Local Optical Interface Board
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
P
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PBX Private Branch Exchange
PC Personal Computer
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PHI Packet Handling Interface
PIN Personal Identification Number
PLL Permanent Logic Link
PPS Pre-Paid Service
PRA Primary Rate Adaptation
PRI Primary Rate Interface
PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTT Postal, Telegraph and Telephone
PVC Permanent Virtual Channel
R
RACF Remote Activation of Call Forwarding service
RSA Remote RSA Interface Board
RSM Remote Switching Module
S
SCP Service Control Point
SIG Signal Tone Board
SM Switching Module
SPBX Special Private Branch Exchange
SPC Service Processing Board
SPD Special Tone Board
SPM Service Processing Module
SPT Special Tone Board
SQL Structured Query Language
SRC Shared Resource Board

C-4
Operation Manual – Supplementary Services Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations

SRM Specialized Resource Module


SS7 CCITT Signaling System No.7
SSP Service Switching Point
SUB Sub-addressing service
T
TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TP Terminal Portability
TS TimeSlot
TUP Telephone User Part
TV Television
U
UP User Parts
UUI User-to-User Information
UUS User-to-User Signaling
V
VC Virtual Channel
VM Voice Mailbox
W
WAC Wide Area Centrex

C-5

You might also like